EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf

225 excerpts.

Manualslib.com - The Global Manuals Library

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 1 · Applies to: 453

Manuals / Brands / SMART Manuals / Automobile / EQ forfour / Owner's manual / PDF SMART EQ FORFOUR OWNER'S MANUAL Quick Links Cockpit Charging the High-Voltage Battery

Table of Contents

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 2 · Applies to: 453

Table of Contents Protecting the environment smart genuine parts Warranty for the smart Audio-System and smart Media-System Vehicle equipment Operating safety QR codes for rescue card Data stored in the vehicle Copyright information Cockpit Multifunction steering wheel Centre console with drawer Overhead control panel Door control panel Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display Occupant safety Travelling safely with children in the vehicle Pets in the vehicle Driving safely

Understanding functions of the key

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 3 · Applies to: 453

Opening the door Correct driver's seat position Adjusting the seats Adjusting the steering wheel Adjusting the mirrors Adjusting head restraints in the rear compartment Using the armrest Starting the engine Pulling away Automatic transmission Using the turn signals Acoustic presence indicator Radar-based recuperation Driving economically Braking correctly Driving on wet roads Winter driving Lane Keeping Assist Cruise control and limiter Charging the high-voltage battery

Switching on the lighting

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 4 · Applies to: 453

Adjusting the lighting Using the interior lighting Using the windscreen wipers Folding the sun visor to the side Locking and unlocking the doors from the inside Understanding the reversing feature Opening and closing the windows Opening and closing the folding top Operating the climate control system Activating/deactivating the seat heating and steering wheel heating Using the accessories Parking Using the parking aid Using the reversing camera Locking the vehicle Priming and deactivating the anti- theft alarm system Overview of the on-board computer Calling up displays Setting values Operating and setting the smart Audio-System

Listening to the radio

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 5 · Applies to: 453

Using a mobile phone Operating external data storage media Operating and setting up the smart Media-System Listening to the radio Displaying energy consumption Using a mobile phone Connecting and operating external data storage media Viewing images Video playback Using TomTom Services Using the navigation system Online access to the vehicle Using smart "ready to" services Stowing small objects Removing and fitting the rear shelf Stowing luggage and large objects Using lashing eyelets Enlarging the load compartment Removing/fitting the charging cable bag Useful information

Removing/fitting the subwoofer

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 6 · Applies to: 453

Opening and closing the service cover Checking service products and topping up Checking wheels and tyres Changing a wheel Using the tyre pressure monitor Checking the tyre pressures Using winter tyres Using snow chains Changing the window wiper blades Cleaning the vehicle Observing service due dates Parking up the vehicle Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown Removing the first-aid kit Removing the fire extinguisher Removing the vehicle tool tray Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit Towing the vehicle Manually releasing the selector lever lock Replacing the bulbs

Changing fuses

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 7 · Applies to: 453

Replacing the key battery Opening a door with the emergency release Locking the doors in an emergency Unlocking the tailgate with the emergency release Notes on display messages Locking and unlocking Vision, vehicle occupants, airbag Engine, brakes, transmission Charging process Driving safety systems Driver assistance systems Battery, lights, heating smart Audio-System and smart Media-System Obtaining technical data Reading vehicle data Service products Bulb types Fuse allocation Other ManualsLib Projects

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 9 · Applies to: 453

The following symbols are used in this Own- er's Manual: G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others. H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal. ! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. i These symbols indicate useful instruc- tions or further information that could be helpful to you. X Instructions that must be followed. X Several consecutive symbols indicate an instruction with several consecutive steps. (Y page) Further information on a topic YY A warning or an instruction that is con- tinued on the next page. Display text: Display text in the instru- ment cluster display, the smart Audio-Sys- tem or the smart Media-System.

About this Owner's Manual

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 10 · Applies to: 453

Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disre- garding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. This Owner's Manual provides information on the most important functions of your vehicle. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to: RModel ROrder RCountry variant RAvailability The illustrations in this manual show a left- hand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of components and con- trols differs accordingly. smart is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. smart therefore reserves the right to intro- duce changes in the following areas: RDesign REquipment RTechnical features Therefore, the description may differ from your vehicle in some cases. Integral parts of the vehicle include: ROwner's Manual RService Booklet REquipment-dependent Supplements These documents should be kept in the vehi- cle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. Your Owner's Manuals: Digital on the Internet The Owner's Manual on the Internet provides you with convenient access to all the information relevant to your vehicle and multimedia system. It also offers helpful animations, exciting background information and a wide variety of search options. Digital as an app Using the smart guides app, you can call up all of the information relevant to your vehicle and multimedia system online on your phone or as a download regardless of the status of your network connection. Available for smartphones or tablets. QR codes for the smart guides app. Apple® iOS Android™ Please note that the smart guides app may not currently be available in your country. 4535846814 É4535846814*ËÍ

Index .........................................................

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 11 · Applies to: 453

5 Introduction ........................................... 21 Protecting the environment ................. 21 smart genuine parts .............................. 21 Warranty for the smart Audio-Sys- tem and smart Media-System .............. 22 Vehicle equipment ................................. 22 Operating safety .................................... 22 QR codes for rescue card ....................... 27 Data stored in the vehicle .................... 27 Copyright information .......................... 29 At a glance .............................................. 30 Cockpit .................................................... 30 Multifunction steering wheel .............. 31 Centre console with drawer .................. 32 Overhead control panel ......................... 33 Door control panel ................................. 34 Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display ......................... 35 Safety ...................................................... 36 Occupant safety ..................................... 36 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle .............................................. 42 Pets in the vehicle ................................. 56 Driving safely ........................................ 56 Entering and setting up ........................ 60 Understanding functions of the key ... 60 Opening the door ................................... 60 Correct driver's seat position ............... 60 Adjusting the seats ............................... 61 Adjusting the steering wheel ............... 62 Adjusting the mirrors ............................ 63 Adjusting head restraints in the rear compartment .................................. 64 Using the armrest .................................. 65 Driving ..................................................... 66 Starting the engine ............................... 66 Pulling away .......................................... 66 Automatic transmission ........................ 68 Using the turn signals .......................... 69 Acoustic presence indicator ................. 69 Radar-based recuperation ................... 69 Driving economically ............................ 70 Braking correctly ................................... 73 Driving on wet roads ............................. 74 Winter driving ........................................ 74 Lane Keeping Assist .............................. 74 Cruise control and limiter .................... 75 Charging the high-voltage battery ..... 76 Ensuring good visibility ........................ 86 Switching on the lighting ..................... 86 Adjusting the lighting .......................... 87 Using the interior lighting ................... 88 Using the windscreen wipers ............... 88 Folding the sun visor to the side ......... 90 Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior .................................................... 91 Locking and unlocking the doors from the inside ....................................... 91 Understanding the reversing fea- ture .......................................................... 92 Opening and closing the windows ....... 92 Opening and closing the folding top ... 93 Operating the climate control sys- tem ........................................................... 94 Activating/deactivating the seat heating and steering wheel heating ... 96 Using the accessories ........................... 97 Parking and getting out ...................... 102 Parking .................................................. 102 Using the parking aid ......................... 102 Using the reversing camera ............... 103 Locking the vehicle ............................. 105 Priming and deactivating the anti- theft alarm system .............................. 105 Operating the on-board computer ..... 106 Overview of the on-board computer .. 106 Calling up displays .............................. 107 Setting values ...................................... 109 2 Contents

Using the smart Audio-System ........... 112

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 12 · Applies to: 453

Operating and setting the smart Audio-System ....................................... 112 Listening to the radio .......................... 114 Using a mobile phone .......................... 116 Operating external data storage media ..................................................... 118 Using the smart Media-System .......... 120 Operating and setting up the smart Media-System ...................................... 120 Listening to the radio .......................... 125 Displaying energy consumption ........ 126 Using a mobile phone .......................... 127 Connecting and operating external data storage media .............................. 131 Viewing images .................................... 133 Video playback ..................................... 134 Using TomTom Services ...................... 134 Using the navigation system ............. 136 Using online offerings ......................... 146 Online access to the vehicle ............... 146 Using smart "ready to" services ........ 146 Loading and stowing ............................ 148 Stowing small objects ......................... 148 Removing and fitting the rear shelf .. 149 Stowing luggage and large objects ... 149 Using lashing eyelets ......................... 150 Enlarging the load compartment ....... 151 Removing/fitting the charging cable bag ............................................... 153 Maintenance and care .......................... 154 Useful information ............................... 154 Removing/fitting the subwoofer ........ 154 Opening and closing the service cover ...................................................... 154 Checking service products and top- ping up .................................................. 156 Checking wheels and tyres ................. 157 Changing a wheel ................................ 158 Using the tyre pressure monitor ....... 161 Checking the tyre pressures .............. 162 Using winter tyres ............................... 163 Using snow chains ............................... 164 Changing the window wiper blades .. 164 Cleaning the vehicle ............................ 165 Observing service due dates .............. 169 Parking up the vehicle ........................ 169 Dealing with accidents and break- downs .................................................... 170 Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown ............... 170 Removing the first-aid kit .................. 173 Removing the fire extinguisher ......... 173 Removing the vehicle tool tray .......... 174 Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit .. 174 Towing the vehicle .............................. 177 Manually releasing the selector lever lock .............................................. 178 Replacing the bulbs ............................ 179 Changing fuses ..................................... 181 Replacing the key battery .................. 183 Opening a door with the emergency release ................................................... 183 Locking the doors in an emergency .. 184 Unlocking the tailgate with the emergency release ............................... 184 Practical advice .................................... 186 Notes on display messages ................ 186 Locking and unlocking ........................ 186 Vision, vehicle occupants, airbag ...... 188 Engine, brakes, transmission ............. 190 Charging process ................................. 192 Driving safety systems ....................... 195 Driver assistance systems .................. 200 Battery, lights, heating ....................... 203 smart Audio-System and smart Media-System ...................................... 205 Technical data ...................................... 207 Obtaining technical data .................... 207 Reading vehicle data ........................... 207 Service products .................................. 209 Bulb types ............................................. 209 Fuse allocation ..................................... 210 Contents 3

Radio type approvals for the tyre

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 13 · Applies to: 453

pressure monitors ................................ 212 Installing two-way radios and mobile phones ...................................... 213 4 Contents

12 V battery

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 14 · Applies to: 453

1, 2, 3 ... 12 V battery Important safety notes ................... 25 12 V socket see Socket (12 V) A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 195 Function/notes ................................. 56 Warning lamp (yellow) .................. 195 Acceleration see Kickdown Acoustic presence indicator Deactivating/activating ................. 69 Function/notes ................................. 69 Active Brake Assist Activating or deactivating ............. 58 Display message ............................ 200 Forward collision warning function ............................................ 58 Function/notes ................................. 57 Important safety notes ................... 57 Switching off/on (on-board computer with colour display) ..... 110 Switching on/off (on-board computer with monochrome display) ........................................... 109 Adaptive brake lights ............................ 58 Adjusting the headlamp range ............. 87 Air conditioning General notes ................................... 94 Air distribution Setting (automatic climate con- trol) .................................................... 94 Air pressure see Tyre pressure Air vents Important safety notes ................... 96 Setting ............................................... 96 Air vents see Air vents Air-recirculation mode Switching on/off (automatic climate control) ................................ 95 Airbag Enabling and disabling the passenger airbag* ........................... 51 Installation locations ...................... 40 Limited protection ........................... 41 Overview ........................................... 40 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ................................................. 41 Airbags Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ........................................ 40 Kneebag ............................................ 40 Protection provided ......................... 40 Sidebag ............................................. 40 Triggering ........................................ 37 Windowbag ....................................... 40 Alarm Anti-theft alarm system ............... 105 Switching off .................................. 105 Alerts Setting (Audio-System) ................ 115 Ambient lighting Setting the brightness .................. 111 Switching on/off ............................ 110 Android Auto™ Using ............................................... 130 Animals see Pets in the vehicle Anti-entrapment feature see Reversing feature Anti-lock Braking System see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-skid chains see Snow chains Anti-theft alarm system Priming/deactivating .................... 105 Switching off the alarm ................ 105 Aquaplaning ........................................... 74 Ashtray .................................................... 97 Audio-System Connecting a mobile phone .......... 116 Connecting Bluetooth® audio devices ............................................ 119 Connecting external audio equipment (AUX) ............................ 119 Operating ........................................ 112 Operating the radio ....................... 114 Operating via the mobile phone .. 113 Index 5

Overview ......................................... 112

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 15 · Applies to: 453

Setting interruption for news ...... 115 Setting the time ............................. 114 Smartphone bracket ...................... 112 System settings ............................. 113 Troubleshooting ............................. 205 Using external devices .................. 112 Volume/sound settings ................. 114 Warranty ........................................... 22 Authorised workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Automatic climate control Activating/deactivating air- recirculation mode .......................... 95 Cooling with air dehumidifica- tion .................................................... 95 Demisting the rear window ............ 95 Demisting the windscreen .............. 95 Increasing/decreasing the blower speed .................................... 94 Setting air distribution .................. 94 Setting the temperature ................. 94 Switching on/off .............................. 94 Windows misted up ......................... 95 Automatic headlamp mode .................... 86 Automatic transmission Display message ............................ 191 Engaging neutral ............................. 68 Engaging reverse gear .................... 68 Engaging the park position ............ 68 Important safety notes ................... 68 Kickdown .......................................... 68 Manually releasing the selector lever lock ........................................ 178 Pulling away .................................... 66 Starting the engine ......................... 66 Transmission positions .................. 68 AUX jack Audio-System ................................. 112 Media-System ................................ 120 B Battery Display message ............................ 203 Battery see High-voltage battery Battery (key) Important safety notes ................. 183 Replacing ........................................ 183 Battery (vehicle) see High-voltage battery Belt see Seat belt Belt tensioner Activation ......................................... 37 Belt warning ........................................... 39 Blower speed Increasing or decreasing (auto- matic climate control) ..................... 94 Bluetooth® Activating mobile phone (Audio-System) .............................. 116 Activating the mobile phone (Media-System) .............................. 127 Authorising function for mobile phone (Audio-System) .................. 116 Connecting a device (Media- System) ........................................... 132 Operating (Audio-System) ............ 119 Switching on/off (Media-Sys- tem) ................................................. 127 Bonnet (front) see Service cover Brake EBD ..................................................... 59 Brake Assist see Active Brake Assist Brake fluid Display message ............................ 191 Brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Brake lamp Replacing bulbs ............................. 180 Brake lamps Adaptive ............................................ 58 Display message ............................ 203 Brakes ABS ..................................................... 56 Driving tips ...................................... 73 Important safety notes ................... 73 Parking brake ................................... 67 Warning lamp ................................. 191 6 Index

Braking

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 16 · Applies to: 453

Braking on steep downhill gra- dients ................................................ 73 Braking on wet road surfaces ........ 73 Limited braking performance on salt-treated roads ...................... 73 Breakdown Towing away .................................. 177 see Flat tyre C Car see Vehicle Car key see Key Car wash see Care Car wash (care) ..................................... 165 Care Automatic car wash ....................... 165 Carpets ............................................ 169 Cleaning the interior ..................... 168 Display ............................................ 168 Exterior ........................................... 165 Exterior lighting ............................ 167 High-pressure cleaner .................. 166 High-voltage battery ...................... 79 Interior ............................................ 168 Notes ............................................... 165 Paint ................................................ 167 Plastic trim ..................................... 168 Reversing camera .......................... 166 Roof lining .............................. 167, 169 Seat belt .......................................... 168 Seat cover ....................................... 168 Selector lever ................................. 168 Sensors ............................................ 166 Steering wheel ............................... 168 Trim pieces ..................................... 169 Washing by hand ........................... 166 Wheels ............................................. 166 Windows .......................................... 167 Wiper blades ................................... 167 Cargo box Removing (rear seats) ................... 153 Central locking Automatic locking ............................ 91 Locking/unlocking (key) ............... 105 Centre console Overview ........................................... 32 Changing the route Navigation ...................................... 140 Charge cable Display message ............................ 192 Charge level display .............................. 71 Charging see Charging the high-voltage battery Charging cable Connection ........................................ 85 Control panel .................................... 82 Disconnecting .................................. 85 Heating up ........................................ 79 Storing .............................................. 85 Version 1 (mode 2) ........................... 83 Version 2 (mode 2) ........................... 83 Charging cable bag Removing/fitting ........................... 153 Charging current Display messages .......................... 192 Child seat Approval categories ........................ 46 Basic instructions ........................... 42 Disabling or enabling the front passenger front airbag ................... 51 Front passenger seat (notes) .......... 55 ISOFIX/i-Size (fitting) ..................... 49 Notes on risks and dangers ............ 43 Recommendations for child restraint systems ............................ 45 Seats suitable for belt-secured child restraint systems .................. 53 Seats suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems ............................ 48 Securing (notes) ............................... 46 Securing on the front passenger seat .................................................... 55 Securing on the rear seat ............... 54 Suitability of the seats for i- Size child restraint systems .......... 49 Top Tether ........................................ 51 Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle .... 43 Basic instructions ........................... 42 Cigarette lighter ..................................... 97 Index 7

Cleaning

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 17 · Applies to: 453

see Care Climate control Automatic air conditioning ............ 94 Setting the air vents ....................... 96 Clock Setting the time (Media-Sys- tem) ................................................. 123 Cockpit Overview ........................................... 30 Collision warning Warning lamp ................................. 200 COMAND display Cleaning .......................................... 168 Connectivity manager .......................... 135 Constant headlamp mode see Daytime driving lights Consumption details Calling up (Media-System) ........... 127 Controlling speed see Cruise control Coolant Checking coolant level and top- ping up ............................................ 156 Important safety notes ................. 156 Cooling see Climate control Cooling with air dehumidification Automatic climate control .............. 95 Copyright ................................................ 29 Cornering light function ........................ 87 Cover (front) see Service cover Crosswind Assist ..................................... 58 Cruise control Activating ......................................... 76 Buttons .............................................. 76 Calling up the speed last stored .... 76 Cancelling cruise control ................ 76 Deactivating ..................................... 76 Display message (colour dis- play) ................................................ 202 Display message (monochrome display) ........................................... 202 Function/notes ................................. 75 General notes ................................... 75 Important safety notes ................... 75 Increasing/decreasing the speed ................................................. 76 Storing and maintaining cur- rent speed ......................................... 76 Cup holder Centre console ................................ 148 Important safety notes ................. 148 Rear compartment ......................... 149 Cup holder see Cup holder D DAB radio see Digital radio Dashboard see Cockpit Data see Technical data Data sharing Managing ........................................ 136 Data storage media see External data storage media Daytime driving lights ........................... 86 Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop Declarations of conformity .................... 23 Diagnostics connection .......................... 25 Digital radio Audio-System ................................. 115 Displaying services (Media- System) ........................................... 126 EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) (Media-System) ................. 126 Frequency range (Audio-Sys- tem) ................................................. 115 Intellitext™ (Media-System) ........ 126 Introducing (Audio-System) ........ 115 Media-System ................................ 125 Setting interruption for news (Audio-System) .............................. 115 Slide show (Media-System) .......... 126 Digital speedometer Displaying ...................................... 110 Dipped-beam headlamps Driving abroad ................................. 88 Replacing bulbs ............................. 179 Switching on/off .............................. 86 8 Index

Display

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 18 · Applies to: 453

Colour .............................................. 106 Monochrome ................................... 106 Display message Colour display ................................ 109 Display messages General information ...................... 186 Disposal of old devices .......................... 80 Distance recorder Monochrome display ..................... 107 Distance recorder see Trip meter Door Automatic locking (switch) ............ 91 Central locking/unlocking (key) .. 105 Control panel .................................... 34 Display message ............................ 187 Emergency locking ........................ 184 Emergency unlocking ................... 183 Opening (from the inside) ............... 91 Unlocking (key) ................................ 60 Double lock function .............................. 91 Driver's door see Door Driver's seat see Seat Driving abroad Symmetrical dipped beam .............. 88 Driving noise see Acoustic presence indicator Driving safety system Active Brake Assist .......................... 57 Crosswind Assist .............................. 58 Driving safety system limita- tions .................................................. 56 EBD (electronic brake force dis- tribution) .......................................... 59 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .... 56 Adaptive brake lights ..................... 58 ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- gram) ................................................. 58 ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- tem) ................................................... 58 Driving systems Cruise control ................................... 75 Lane Keeping Assist ........................ 74 Speed limiter .................................... 75 Driving tips Aquaplaning ..................................... 74 Brakes ................................................ 73 Downhill gradient ............................ 73 Driving in winter ............................. 74 Driving on flooded roads ................ 74 Driving on wet roads ....................... 74 Icy road surfaces ............................. 74 Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ...................................... 73 Pulling away .................................... 66 Symmetrical dipped beam .............. 88 see Economical driving Dynamic handling control system see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) E EBD (electronic brake force distri- bution) Function/notes ................................. 59 Indicator lamp ................................ 195 ECO mode Switching on/off .............................. 70 eco score Calling up ......................................... 72 Comparing the trip .......................... 72 Display (colour display) ................. 72 Display (monochrome display) ...... 72 Evaluating the current trip ............ 72 Function/notes ................................. 71 Resetting data .................................. 73 Saving the trip ................................. 72 Economical driving eco score display ............................. 71 General information ........................ 70 Electrical fuses see Fuses Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity ............... 23 Electronic Brake-force Distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Index 9

Electronic Traction System

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 19 · Applies to: 453

see ETS (Electronic Traction System) Emergency assistance system Automatic emergency call ............ 171 Button in the overhead control panel ............................................... 170 Manual emergency call ................. 171 Overview ......................................... 170 Requirements ................................. 170 Transmitted data ........................... 170 Emergency release Driver's door ................................... 183 Emergency unlocking Tailgate ........................................... 184 Vehicle ............................................ 183 Energy Displaying the current con- sumption (colour display) ............ 108 Energy consumption High-voltage battery ...................... 79 Energy flow display Calling up (Media-System) ........... 126 Colour display ................................ 108 Engine Starting problems .......................... 190 Starting the engine with the key .. 66 Engine electronics Notes ................................................. 22 Entering a destination Navigation ...................................... 137 Environmental protection High-voltage battery ...................... 21 Returning an end-of-life vehi- cle ...................................................... 21 EPG (Electronic Program Guide) Displaying (Audio-System) .......... 116 EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) Displaying (Media-System) .......... 126 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Crosswind Assist .............................. 58 Display message ............................ 196 General notes ................................... 58 Important safety guidelines .......... 58 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 196 ETS (Electronic Traction System) ......... 58 Exterior lighting Cleaning .......................................... 167 see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting .......................................... 64 Out of position (troubleshoot- ing) .................................................. 188 External audio equipment (AUX) Connecting (Audio-System) ......... 119 External data carriers Connection (Media-System) ......... 132 Operation (Media-System) ........... 132 External data storage media Connecting (Audio-System) ......... 112 Operating (Audio-System) ............ 118 F Factory settings Resetting (Media-System) ............ 123 Favourites Creating (Media-System) .............. 124 Managing (Media-System) ........... 124 Fire extinguisher .................................. 173 First-aid kit .......................................... 173 Fitting a wheel Fitting a wheel ............................... 160 Preparing the vehicle .................... 159 Raising the vehicle ........................ 159 Removing a wheel .......................... 159 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ................................... 172 Fitting/removing front wheel arch cover .................. 180 Flat tyre Preparing the vehicle .................... 170 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 174 Floormat .................................................. 98 Foglamps Switching on/off .............................. 87 Folding top Important safety notes ................... 93 Operating .......................................... 93 Problem (malfunction) .................. 187 Fording On flooded roads .............................. 74 Forward collision warning function Function/notes ................................. 58 Frequencies Mobile phone .................................. 213 Two-way radio ............................... 213 10 Index

Front airbag ............................................ 40

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 20 · Applies to: 453

Front cover see Service cover Front wheel arch Fitting/removing the cover .......... 180 Front-passenger front airbag deac- tivation system PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ................................................. 41 Status indicator ............................... 41 Front-passenger seat see Seat Frontal area cover see Service cover Fuses Allocation chart ............................. 210 Before changing ............................. 182 Dashboard fuse box ....................... 182 Important safety notes ................. 181 Opening the fuse box ..................... 182 G Glove compartment .............................. 149 H Hand brake see Parking brake Hands-free system see Mobile phone Hazard warning lamps Switching on/off ............................ 170 Head restraints Adjusting (rear) ............................... 64 Headlamp flasher ................................... 87 Headlamps see Automatic headlamp mode Heating see Climate control High-voltage battery Battery care ...................................... 79 Charge level ...................................... 71 Charge level display ........................ 71 Charging (charging station) ........... 81 Charging (mains socket) ................. 85 Charging (wallbox) .......................... 81 Charging cable heating up ............. 79 Discharged battery .......................... 78 Display message ............................ 203 Energy consumption ....................... 79 Important safety notes ................... 76 Indicator lamp (vehicle socket) ..... 80 Method of operation ........................ 78 Outside temperatures ...................... 79 Problems during charging ............ 192 Protective equipment ...................... 79 Range ................................................ 79 READY indicator ............................. 203 Terms of use ..................................... 79 Vehicle socket .................................. 80 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 203 High-voltage electrical system Automatic switch-off ...................... 26 Danger of electric shock ................. 26 Operating safety .............................. 26 Vehicle fire ....................................... 26 Hinged windows Opening/closing ............................... 93 Home address Entering and saving ...................... 138 Home address (navigation) see Home address I i-Size child seat securing system Fitting ............................................... 49 Suitable seats for securing ............ 49 i-Traffic Traffic announcements ................. 126 Ice warning Warning lamp (colour display) .... 202 Warning lamp (monochrome display) ........................................... 202 Ignition lock see Key positions Image Playback (Media-System) ............. 133 Immobiliser ........................................... 105 Indicator and warning lamp Restraint system ............................ 189 Indicator and warning lamps Battery ............................................ 203 Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Index 11

Instrument cluster

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 21 · Applies to: 453

Overview ........................................... 35 Warning and indicator lamps ........ 35 Instrument cluster lighting Setting ............................................. 110 Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster lighting Intellitext™ Setting (Media-System) ................ 126 Switching on (Audio-System) ...... 116 Interior lighting ..................................... 88 Adjusting the ambient lighting (colour display) ................................ 88 Changing bulbs .............................. 181 Setting the ambient lighting ....... 110 Switching on/off .............................. 88 Intermittent wipe ................................... 89 ISOFIX child seat securing system Fitting ............................................... 49 Suitable seats for securing ............ 48 J Jack Using ............................................... 159 K Key Changing the battery .................... 183 Loss .................................................. 186 Position in the ignition lock .......... 66 Problem (malfunction) .................. 186 Starting the engine ......................... 66 Key positions (ignition lock) ................. 66 Keyboard Adjusting (Media-System) ............ 122 Kickdown ................................................. 68 Kneebag ................................................... 40 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 75 Function/information ...................... 74 Warning lamp (colour display) .... 202 Warning lamp (monochrome display) ........................................... 202 Lane recognition system (auto- matic) see Lane Keeping Assist Language Selecting (Media-System) ............ 122 Language (on-board computer) .......... 111 Lashing eyelets .................................... 150 Licence plate lighting Changing bulbs .............................. 181 Light see Replacing bulbs Lighting see Lights Lights Automatic headlamp mode ............. 86 Cornering light function ................. 87 Dipped-beam headlamps ................ 86 Display message ............................ 204 Driving abroad ................................. 88 Foglamps .......................................... 87 Hazard warning lamps .................. 170 Headlamp flasher ............................ 87 Headlamp range ............................... 87 Light switch ..................................... 86 Main-beam headlamps ................... 86 Rear foglamp .................................... 87 Setting the ambient lighting ....... 110 Side lamps ........................................ 87 Turn signals ..................................... 69 see Interior lighting Limiter Calling up the stored limit speed ................................................. 76 Cancelling ......................................... 76 Deactivating ..................................... 76 Display message (colour dis- play) ................................................ 202 Exceeding the stored limit speed ................................................. 75 General notes ................................... 75 Increasing or reducing the stored limit speed ............................ 76 Limiting the speed see Speed limiter Loading guidelines ............................... 149 12 Index

Locking

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 22 · Applies to: 453

see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ......................................... 91 Emergency locking ........................ 184 From inside (central locking button) .............................................. 91 Loudspeaker see Subwoofer Luggage compartment enlargement .. 151 M M+S tyres (winter tyres) ...................... 163 Main-beam headlamps Replacing bulbs ............................. 179 Switching on/off .............................. 86 Making a call Media-System ................................ 128 Malfunction message see Display message Manually releasing the selector lever lock (automatic transmission) ... 178 Media-System Adjusting the on-screen key- board ............................................... 122 Buttons on the multifunction steering wheel ............................... 120 Calling up Applications man- ager ................................................. 135 Calling up menus ........................... 122 Connectivity manager ................... 135 Consumption details ...................... 127 Controls ........................................... 120 Creating favourites ........................ 124 Data connectivity .......................... 134 Display settings ............................. 122 Downloading updates and POIs ... 135 eco score ........................................... 72 Enabling data sharing .................. 136 Energy flow display ...................... 126 Home screen ................................... 121 Image playback .............................. 133 Navigation menu ........................... 136 Navigation system ......................... 136 Operating the radio ....................... 125 Overview ......................................... 120 Problem solving ............................. 205 Reversing camera .......................... 103 Selecting the home screen dis- play ................................................. 123 Selecting the language ................. 122 Setting the time ............................. 123 Setting warning tones ................... 124 Status and information ................. 123 Switching on/off ............................ 121 System menu .................................. 122 System settings ............................. 122 Video playback ............................... 134 Volume/tone settings .................... 123 Warranty ........................................... 22 Message memory (colour display) ...... 109 MirrorLink™ Using ............................................... 129 Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror Mobile phone Connecting (Audio-System) ......... 116 Connecting (Media-System) ......... 127 Downloading data automati- cally (Media-System) .................... 128 Frequencies .................................... 213 Installation ..................................... 213 Loading and updating the tele- phone book (Audio-System) ......... 116 Making a call (Media-System) ..... 128 Setting the sound (Audio-Sys- tem) ................................................. 117 Transmission output (maxi- mum) ................................................ 213 Using Android Auto™ .................... 130 Using MirrorLink™ ........................ 129 Using voice control (Audio- System) ........................................... 118 Using voice control (Media- System) ........................................... 131 Model series see Vehicle identification plate Multi-functional seat see Seat Multifunction steering wheel Overview ........................................... 31 Index 13

Navigation

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 23 · Applies to: 453

N Navigation Alternative route ........................... 140 Changing the route ........................ 140 Current location ............................. 143 Destination memory ...................... 138 Displaying the reachability map .................................................. 143 Entering a charging station as a destination ..................................... 138 Entering a destination .................. 137 Entering a destination by address ............................................ 137 Entering a destination using geo-coordinates ............................. 137 Entering a destination using the map ........................................... 137 Entering a POI ................................ 138 Entering/saving your home address ............................................ 138 Reading map data .......................... 136 Route details .................................. 140 Selecting a destination from the list of last destinations ................. 137 Setting route planning .................. 141 Setting the voice ............................ 144 Starting ........................................... 136 Starting route calculation ............ 139 Switching announcements on/off ............................................... 141 System settings ............................. 144 TomTom Services ........................... 134 Traffic information ........................ 142 Troubleshooting ............................. 205 Way points ...................................... 140 O Occupant safety Airbags .............................................. 40 Belt warning ..................................... 39 Children in the vehicle ................... 42 PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp ................................................... 41 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 56 Restraint system ............................. 36 Restraint system warning lamp .... 36 Seat belts .......................................... 38 On-board computer Calling up displays (colour dis- play) ................................................ 107 Calling up displays (mono- chrome display) ............................. 107 Important safety notes ................. 106 Operation ........................................ 106 Overview ......................................... 106 Selecting the language ................. 111 Setting and resetting values (colour display) .............................. 109 Setting and resetting values (monochrome display) .................. 109 On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection On-screen keyboard Adjusting (Media-System) ............ 122 Online access ........................................ 146 Operating instructions Vehicle equipment ........................... 22 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ............... 23 High-voltage electrical system ..... 26 Operating system see On-board computer Original parts ......................................... 21 Outside temperature display Colour display ................................ 106 Monochrome display ..................... 106 Setting the units ............................ 110 Outside temperatures High-voltage battery ...................... 79 Overhead control panel ......................... 33 Overvoltage protection High-voltage battery ...................... 79 P Paint code ............................................. 207 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ...... 167 Panorama roof Cleaning .......................................... 167 Park brake see Parking brake Parking .................................................. 102 Engaging park position .................. 68 Important safety notes ................. 102 Parking aid ..................................... 102 14 Index

Parking brake ................................... 67

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 24 · Applies to: 453

Reversing camera .......................... 103 Parking brake Display message ............................ 191 General information ........................ 67 Warning lamp ................................. 191 PASSENGER AIR BAG Disabling/activating ....................... 51 Indicator lamps ................................ 41 Passenger airbag Enabling and disabling ................. 51 Problem (malfunction) ................. 189 Passenger seat Folding down .................................. 151 Pets in the vehicle ................................. 56 Power display ......................................... 71 Power windows see Side windows Pre-entry climate control and charging Colour display ................................ 109 Pre-entry climate control at depar- ture time Smart-Charging ............................... 95 Pre-entry climate control at time of departure Setting departure time .................... 95 Protection against theft Anti-theft alarm system ............... 105 Protection of the environment General notes ................................... 21 Pulling away General notes ................................... 66 Hill start assist ................................ 68 Q QR code Rescue card ...................................... 27 Qualified specialist workshop ............... 25 R Radar-based recuperation Function/notes ................................. 69 Switching off/on (on-board computer with colour display) ..... 110 Radio Display mode .................................. 125 Displaying programme infor- mation (EPG) (Audio-System) ....... 116 i-Traffic (Traffic announce- ments) ............................................. 126 Operating (Audio-System) ............ 114 Operation (Media-System) ........... 125 Radio text Displaying (Audio-System) .......... 115 Displaying (Media-System) .......... 126 Radio type approvals Tyre pressure monitors ................. 212 Radio-based vehicle components Declaration of conformity ............... 23 Rain sensor ............................................. 89 Rain/light sensor (display message) .. 203 Range High-voltage battery ...................... 79 RBS see Radar-based recuperation Reading lamp .......................................... 88 Readyspace seats ................................. 152 Rear bench seat Folding the backrest forwards/ back ................................................. 151 Rear foglamp Replacing bulbs ............................. 180 Switching on/off .............................. 87 Rear lamp Replacing bulbs ............................. 180 Rear parking aid Activating/deactivating ............... 102 Function/notes ............................... 102 Rear seat Adjusting the angle of the backrests ........................................ 152 Rear seat heating ............................. 96 Rear seat see Rear bench seat Rear seats readyspace seats ........................... 152 Removing the cargo box ................ 153 Rotating the seat cushions ........... 152 Rear shelf .............................................. 149 Rear window heating Demisting the rear window (automatic climate control) ............ 95 Index 15

Rear window wiper

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 25 · Applies to: 453

Automatic rear window wiper when in reverse gear ....................... 89 Replacing the wiper blade ............ 165 Switching on/off .............................. 89 Rear-compartment seat belt status indicator .................................................. 40 Rear-view mirror .................................... 63 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ....... 63 Dipping (manual) ............................. 63 Recharging cable Indicator lamp ................................. 82 Recuperation (radar based) Function/notes ................................. 69 Recuperation (radar-based) Switching on and off (colour display) ........................................... 110 Recycling see Protection of the environment Reflective safety jacket ....................... 173 Remote configuration smart control .................................. 146 Remote query functions smart control .................................. 146 Replacing bulbs Brake lamp ...................................... 180 Dipped-beam headlamps .............. 179 Fitting/removing the cover (front wheel arch) .......................... 180 Important safety notes ................. 179 LED ................................................... 180 Licence plate lighting ................... 181 Main-beam headlamps ................. 179 Overview of bulb types ................. 209 Rear foglamp .................................. 180 Rear lamp ........................................ 180 Reversing lamp .............................. 180 Turn signal lamp (rear) ................. 180 see Changing bulbs Replacing lamps see Changing bulbs Replacing the bulb Turn signal lamp (front) ............... 180 Replacing the bulbs Interior lighting ............................ 181 Rescue card ............................................. 27 Restraint system Basic instructions ........................... 42 Display message ............................ 189 Function during an accident .......... 37 Limited protection ........................... 36 Malfunction ...................................... 36 Operational readiness ..................... 36 Protection provided ......................... 36 System self-test .............................. 36 Warning lamp ................................. 189 Warning lamp (function) ................ 36 Reverse gear Engaging (automatic transmis- sion) ................................................... 68 Reversing camera Cleaning instructions ................... 166 Function/notes ............................... 103 Guide lines in the display ............ 104 Settings ........................................... 104 Switching on/off ............................ 104 Reversing feature Side windows .................................... 92 Reversing lamp Replacing bulbs ............................. 180 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning instructions) ......................................... 169 S Safety Children in the vehicle ................... 42 see Occupant safety see Operating safety Safety system see Driving safety system SD card Connecting (Media-System) ......... 132 Reading map data .......................... 136 SD card slot ..................................... 120 Seat Adjusting rear head restraint ........ 64 Correct driver's seat position ......... 60 Folding passenger seat down ....... 151 Folding the backrest (rear com- partment) forwards/back .............. 151 Seat belt Limited protection ........................... 38 Protection provided ......................... 38 Seat belts Adjusting the height ....................... 39 16 Index

Cleaning .......................................... 168

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 26 · Applies to: 453

Fastening .......................................... 39 Rear seat belt status indicator ...... 40 Releasing .......................................... 39 Warning lamp ................................. 188 Warning lamp (function) ................ 39 Seat cushions Rotating (rear seats) ..................... 152 Seat heating ............................................ 96 Seats Adjusting (manually) ...................... 61 Cleaning the cover ......................... 168 Important safety notes ................... 61 Switching seat heating on/off ........ 96 Selector lever Cleaning .......................................... 168 Selector lever see Automatic transmission Sensors (cleaning instructions) .......... 166 Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Service cover ........................................ 154 Service display Calling up (colour display) ........... 109 Calling up (monochrome dis- play) ................................................ 107 Service due date Display message ............................ 192 Service products Brake fluid ...................................... 209 Coolant (engine) ............................. 156 Important safety notes ................. 156 Washer fluid ................................... 209 Services menu settings TomTom Services ........................... 134 Setting the charge current Charging cable version 2 ................ 84 Side lamps Switching on/off .............................. 87 Side windows Important safety notes ................... 92 Opening/closing ............................... 93 Opening/closing the hinged window .............................................. 93 Problem (malfunction) .................. 187 Resetting ......................................... 187 Reversing feature ............................ 92 Sidebag .................................................... 40 smart Centre see Qualified specialist workshop smart control Internet ........................................... 146 smart Services Registering ..................................... 146 Using ............................................... 146 Smart-Charging Function/notes ................................. 95 Smartphone Fitting the bracket ........................ 113 Inserting/removing ....................... 113 Operating the Audio-System via the mobile phone ..................... 113 Smartphone Screen Setting (Media -System) ............... 129 Snow chains .......................................... 164 Socket (12 V) Centre console .................................. 98 Socket (high-voltage battery) see Vehicle socket Sound Setting (Audio-System) ................ 114 Setting (Media-System) ................ 123 Sound generator see Acoustic presence indicator Speakers see Subwoofer Special destination Entry ............................................... 138 Specialist workshop ............................... 25 Speed limiter Activating ......................................... 76 Functions and conditions for activation ......................................... 75 Setting limit speed .......................... 76 Speedometer Digital ............................................. 106 Displaying (digital speedome- ter) ................................................... 110 General notes (digital speed- ometer) ............................................ 109 see Instrument cluster Starting (engine) .................................... 66 Starting the engine see Starting (engine) Index 17

Station

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 27 · Applies to: 453

Selecting a stored station (Audio-System) .............................. 115 Setting (Media-System) ................ 125 Station list Setting a station from the sta- tion list (Audio-System) ............... 115 Updating (Media-System) ............ 126 Station search Audio-System ................................. 115 Stations Setting (Audio-System) ................ 114 Storing (Audio-System) ................ 115 Steering Display message (colour dis- play) ................................................ 200 Warning lamps ............................... 200 Steering wheel Adjusting (manually) ...................... 62 Button overview ............................... 31 Cleaning .......................................... 168 Important safety notes ................... 62 Steering wheel heating Switching on/off .............................. 96 Stowage compartments Centre console ................................ 148 Cup holder ....................................... 148 Door ................................................. 148 Glove compartment ........................ 148 Important safety information ...... 148 Rear ................................................. 149 Subwoofer Fitting/removing ........................... 154 Sun visor ................................................. 90 T Tablet bracket Affixing protective film .................. 99 Dismantling .................................... 101 Important safety notes ................... 98 Mounting .......................................... 99 Using ................................................. 98 Tailgate Emergency unlocking ................... 184 Opening dimensions ...................... 207 Opening/closing ............................. 150 Warning lamp ................................. 187 Technical data Information .................................... 207 Vehicle data .................................... 207 Telephone book Loading (Audio-System) ............... 116 Telephone operation Audio-System ................................. 117 Temperature Setting (automatic climate con- trol) .................................................... 94 Time Setting (Audio-System) ................ 114 Setting (colour display) ................ 110 Setting (monochrome display) ..... 109 Setting the time format (colour display) ........................................... 110 TIREFIT kit ............................................ 174 TomTom Services Activating ....................................... 135 Introduction ................................... 134 My Services menu .......................... 135 Starting ........................................... 135 Subscription status ....................... 135 Traffic information menu ............. 143 Tool see Vehicle tool kit Top Tether .............................................. 51 Total distance recorder Colour display ................................ 108 Monochrome display ..................... 106 Setting the display unit ................ 110 Touchscreen Confirming settings with Done .... 122 Operating the touchscreen ........... 121 Towing Important safety notes ................. 177 Towing away Fitting the towing eye .................. 178 Removing the towing eye ............. 178 With both axles on the ground ..... 178 Traction system see ETS (Electronic Traction System) Traffic reports Switching on/off ............................ 115 Transmission see Automatic transmission Transporting the vehicle ..................... 178 18 Index

Trip computer

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 28 · Applies to: 453

Displaying ...................................... 108 Trip meter Colour display ................................ 108 Displaying (colour display) .......... 108 Displaying (monochrome dis- play) ................................................ 107 Trip meter see Trip meter Turn signal lamp (front) Replacing the bulb ........................ 180 Turn signal lamp (rear) Replacing bulbs ............................. 180 Turn signals Replacing the bulb ........................ 180 Switching on/off .............................. 69 Turn signals see Turn signals Two-way radio Frequencies .................................... 213 Installation ..................................... 213 Transmission output (maxi- mum) ................................................ 213 Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate Tyre pressure Checking/correcting ...................... 163 Display message ............................ 197 Important safety notes ................. 162 Not reached (TIREFIT) ................... 176 Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 176 Recommended ................................ 162 Tyre pressure monitor Function/notes ............................... 161 Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor ........................... 212 Restarting ....................................... 161 Starting ........................................... 110 Warning lamp ................................. 197 Tyres Changing a wheel .......................... 158 Checking ......................................... 157 Direction of rotation ...................... 160 Important safety notes ................. 157 M+S tyres (winter tyres) ............... 163 Rules for new tyres ........................ 158 Service life ...................................... 158 Snow chains .................................... 164 Storing ............................................ 161 Tyre tread ....................................... 157 see Flat tyre U Unit of measurement for distance Setting ............................................. 110 Units Setting (on-board computer) ....... 110 Unlocking From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................ 91 With emergency key element ....... 183 USB device Connecting (Audio-System) ......... 118 Connection (Media-System) ......... 132 Operating (Audio-System) ............ 118 USB port Audio-System ................................. 112 Media-System ................................ 120 V Values Setting (colour display) ................ 109 Setting (monochrome display) ..... 109 Vehicle Correct use ........................................ 27 Data acquisition .............................. 27 Electronics ........................................ 22 Equipment ........................................ 22 Implied warranty ............................. 27 Locking (in an emergency) ........... 184 Locking (key) .................................. 105 Operating safety .............................. 22 Parking ............................................ 102 Parking up ...................................... 169 Raising ............................................ 159 Registration ...................................... 26 Remote configuration .................... 146 Remote query functions ................ 146 Securing from rolling away .......... 172 Towing away .................................. 177 Transporting .................................. 178 Unlocking (in an emergency) ....... 183 Unlocking (key) ................................ 60 Vehicle data .................................... 207 Vehicle data .......................................... 207 Index 19

Vehicle dimensions .............................. 207

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 29 · Applies to: 453

Vehicle emergency locking ................. 184 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate ................. 207 Vehicle key see Key Vehicle socket High-voltage battery ...................... 80 Indicator lamp ................................. 80 Problems during the charging process ............................................ 192 Vehicle tool kit ..................................... 174 Ventilation see Air conditioning Video Playback (Media-System) ............. 134 VIN ......................................................... 207 Voice control system Entering a destination in the navigation system ......................... 137 Problems with the voice control system ............................................. 206 Starting an application ................. 120 Voltage range High-voltage battery ...................... 78 Volume Adjusting automatically ............... 114 Setting (Audio-System) ................ 114 Setting (Media-System) ................ 123 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................... 195 Active Brake Assist ........................ 200 Brakes .............................................. 191 Collision warning (red) ................. 200 EBD ................................................... 195 ESP® (yellow) .................................. 196 High-voltage battery .................... 203 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 201 Overview ........................................... 35 Parking brake ................................. 191 PASSENGER AIR BAG ........................ 41 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 189 Seat belt .......................................... 188 Steering ........................................... 200 Tyre pressure monitor .................. 197 Warning triangle .................................. 172 Wheel bolt tightening torque .............. 160 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 158 Checking ......................................... 157 Cleaning .......................................... 166 Fitting a new wheel ....................... 160 Important safety notes ................. 157 Removing a wheel .......................... 159 Snow chains .................................... 164 Storing ............................................ 161 Tightening torque ......................... 160 Windowbag .............................................. 40 Windows Cleaning .......................................... 167 see Side windows Windscreen Demisting (automatic climate control) ............................................. 95 Windscreen washer fluid see Windscreen washer system Windscreen washer system Important safety notes ................. 157 Topping up ..................................... 157 Windscreen wipers Intermittent wipe ............................ 89 Problem (malfunction) .................. 188 Rain sensor ....................................... 89 Rear window wiper .......................... 89 Replacing the wiper blades .......... 164 Switching on/off .............................. 88 Wiping with washer fluid ............... 89 Wing see Front wheel arch Winter driving General notes ................................... 74 Winter operation Slippery road surfaces .................... 74 Snow chains .................................... 164 Winter tyres M+S tyres ........................................ 163 Wiper blades Cleaning .......................................... 167 Replacing (on the rear window) ... 165 Replacing (windscreen) ................ 164 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop 20 Index

Protecting the environment

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 30 · Applies to: 453

General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of com- prehensive environmental protection. Our objectives are to use the natural resources which form the basis of our exis- tence on this planet sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into consider- ation. You too can help to protect the environ- ment by operating your vehicle in an envi- ronmentally-responsible manner. Energy consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. Therefore, please bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Robserve the correct tyre pressure. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight in the vehicle Rremove the roof rack once you no longer need it. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will con- tribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rall maintenance work should be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe dis- tance from the vehicle in front. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Rmonitor the vehicle's energy consump- tion. High-voltage battery H Environmental note Have a defective high-voltage battery dis- posed of in an environmentally-responsi- ble manner. Contact a specialist workshop, which is qualified for smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio or smart EQ forfour, and has the necessary special skills and tools to carry out the work required. smart recommends a smart centre for this. Returning an end-of-life vehicle EU countries only: smart will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) End-Of-Life Vehicles Directive. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving resources. A network of vehicle take-back points and dismantlers has been established for you to return your vehicle. Returning vehicles to these facilities is free of charge. For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-back conditions, please visit the national smart website for your country. smart genuine parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. For these, the same warranty applies as for new parts. ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars Rdoor sills Rseats Rdashboard

Introduction. 21 Z

Rinstrument cluster

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 31 · Applies to: 453

Rcentre console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint sys- tems. Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop. Only smart genuine parts or parts of the same quality may be used. Additionally, only tyres, wheels and accessories approved for the specific type of vehicle may be used. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering smart genuine parts. Using parts, tyres, wheels or safety-relevant equipment not approved by smart could endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. Safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake sys- tem, could malfunction. smart tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been specif- ically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, smart is unable to assess other parts. smart therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in smart vehicles, even if they have been offi- cially approved or independently approved by a testing centre. In Germany, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. This also applies to some other countries. All gen- uine smart parts meet the approval require- ments. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. The following situations will invalidate the operating permit: RThe vehicle type changes from that stated in the vehicle's operating permit, due to modifications. ROther road users are likely to be endan- gered. REmissions or noise characteristics deteri- orate. Warranty for the smart Audio-System and smart Media-System The smart sales organisation provides a war- ranty for a period of 24 months without a kil- ometre limit for the smart Audio-System and the smart Media-System. The warranty issuer is the respective sales organisation in the country in which the accessory or replacement part was pur- chased (see list in the service booklet). Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle at the time of pub- lication of this Owner's Manual. Country- specific differences are possible. Please note that the vehicle equipment may differ from certain descriptions and illustrations provi- ded in this manual. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. The vehicle's original purchase contract documentation contains a list of all the sys- tems in your vehicle. Please contact any smart centre to help clarify any questions related to the vehicle equipment and opera- tion. Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or necessary repairs carried out, this could result in malfunc- tions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/main- tenance work as well as necessary repairs carried out at a qualified specialist work- shop. G WARNING If you operate information and communi- cation equipment integrated in the vehicle 22

Introduction.

when driving, you could be distracted from

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 32 · Applies to: 453

the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle paying atten- tion to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring could affect their function and/or the operation of other networked components. This could in particular also be the case for systems relevant to safety. They might not function properly anymore and/or jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. Always have work on electrical and elec- tronic components carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop. If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. The driving style should always be adjusted to the current street and weather conditions. An adequate safe dis- tance must be maintained at all times. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driv- ing when operating information systems and communication devices integrated into the vehicle. If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- tronics, the general operating permit is ren- dered invalid. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis In situations like this, the body, the under- body, chassis parts, wheels or tyres could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on con- tinuing your journey you notice that driv- ing safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist work- shop. The multimedia device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information is available from any smart centre. The functionality of a roof aerial (radio, DAB) may be impaired if roof carriers are used. Metallised retrofit film on windows may also affect radio and GPS reception and have a negative impact on all other aerial functions in the vehicle interior. Declarations of conformity Electromagnetic compatibility The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of UNECE standard UN-R10. Declaration of conformity for two-way radio systems according to Directive 2014/53/EU The components of the vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with the basic requirements and all other

Introduction. 23 Z

relevant regulations stipulated by Directive

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 33 · Applies to: 453

2014/53/EU. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. In the following, you will find the addresses of radio component manufacturers which, due to their size or nature, do not allow this information to be indicated on the equip- ment. Tyre pressure monitor sensors: Schrader Electronics Ltd., 11 Technology Park, Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland Transponder ring: Visteon Electronics, 04 Rue Nelson Mandela, Zone Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El Bey, Tunisia Remote keyless entry: Visteon Electronics, 04 Rue Nelson Mandela, Zone Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El Bey, Tunisia Alps Electric Europe GmbH, Ohmstraße 4, D-85716 Unterschleißheim, Germany Radio: Visteon Electronics, 04 Rue Nelson Mandela, Zone Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El Bey, Tunisia Continental Automotive, 1 Rue de Clairefon- taine, 78120 Rambouillet, France Mobile communication and telemetry: Ficosa Internationnal, Gran Via de Carles III 98, 08028 Barcelona, Spain Radar: Robert Bosch GmbH, Daimlerstraße 6, 71229 Leonberg, Germany Windscreen unit: car2go Group GmbH, Fasanenweg 15-17, 70771 Leinfelden-Echterdingen, Germany TIREFIT kit Copy of the original declaration of conform- ity: VERIFICATION OF EMC COMPLIANCE Verification No.: GZEM161000740001V Applicant: ITW Global Tire Repair Europe GmbH Address of Manufac- turer: No. 11 Kuiqing Road, Qingxi Town, Dongguan City, China. Factory: The same as manufacturer Address of Factory: The same as manufacturer Product Description: Air compressor Model No: AEROB-DP Sufficient samples of the product have been tested and found to be in conformity with Test Standards: EN 50498:2010 As shown in the Test Report Number(s): GZEM161000740001 This verification of EMC Compliance has been granted to the applicant based on the results of the tests, performed by laboratory of SGS- CSTC Standards Technical Services Co., Ltd. on the sample of the above-mentioned prod- uct in accordance with the provisions of the relevant specific standards under Directive 2014/30/EU. The CE mark as shown below can be used, under the responsibility of the man- ufacturer, after completion of an EU Decla- ration of Conformity and compliance with all relevant EU Directives. Date: 2016-11-10 Signature: Kobe Jian Type of radio device in the vehicle Frequency range Technology Transmis- sion output/ magnetic field strength 125 kHz (119 kHz - 135 kHz) Trans- ponder ring ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10 m 13.553 MHz - 13.567 MHz Windscreen unit (vehicle access sys- tem for Car2Go) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10 m 433 MHz (433.05 MHz - 434.79 MHz) Remote key- less entry Tyre pres- sure monitor ≤ 10 mW e.r.p. 24

Introduction.

Frequency

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 34 · Applies to: 453

range Technology Transmis- sion output/ magnetic field strength 2.4 GHz ISM waveband (2400 MHz - 2483.5 MHz) Bluetooth® ≤ 100 mW e.i.r.p. 76 GHz - 77 GHz 76 GHzRadar ≤ 55 dBm peak e.i.r.p. Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Only connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, which is approved for your vehicle by Mercedes- Benz. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehi- cle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's foot- well. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and a device is connected to a diagnostic connection, the battery may become discharged. Qualified specialist workshop A qualified specialist workshop has the nec- essary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety. Observe the information contained in the Service Booklet. Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a smart centre: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Rmodifications, installations and conver- sions Rwork on electronic components Rreplacing the 12 V battery within the pre- scribed interval, at the latest every three years You can obtain current information concern- ing the servicing of your vehicle at any time from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a smart centre. Replacing the 12 V battery Observe the notes on the 12 V battery. smart recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a smart centre. If you intend to replace the battery yourself, please observe the following points: Ralways replace a defective battery with a battery which fulfils the specific vehicle requirements The vehicle is equipped with either an AGM (Absorbent Glass Mat) technology battery or a lithium-ion battery. Full vehicle func- tionality is only guaranteed with a battery of the same technology. smart recommends that you only use batteries of the same technology which have been tested and approved for your vehicle. Rcarry over detachable parts, e.g. the breather hose, angled connecting piece or terminal cover from the battery which is being replaced Rmake sure that the breather hose is always connected to the original opening on the battery side

Introduction. 25 Z

Fit current or newly delivered cell caps.

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 35 · Applies to: 453

Otherwise, gases or battery acid may leak. Rmake sure that the detachable parts are reconnected in the same way Vehicle registration smart may ask its smart centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. smart is only able to notify the vehicle owner about vehicle inspections if smart has the vehicle registration data. In the following cases, it is possible that a vehicle has not yet been registered in the owner's name: Rthe vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer Rthe vehicle has not yet been examined at a smart centre smart recommends registering the vehicle in a smart centre. Notify smart as soon as possible if there is a change of address or if ownership of the vehicles changes. This can be done at a smart centre, for example. High-voltage electrical system Danger of electric shock G DANGER The vehicle's high voltage electrical sys- tem is under high voltage. If you modify components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system or touch damaged com- ponents, you may be electrocuted. The components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may be damaged in an accident, although the damage is not visi- ble. There is a risk of fatal injury. Do not touch any high-voltage components after an accident and never modify the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have the vehicle towed away after an acci- dent and the vehicle's high-voltage elec- trical system checked by a qualified spe- cialist workshop. All of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system components are marked with yellow warning stickers which warn you of the dan- gers of high voltages. The cables of the vehi- cle's high-voltage electrical system are orange in colour. Observe the following before carrying out general work such as changing a bulb or checking the coolant level: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe charging cable for charging the high- voltage battery is disconnected Automatically switching off the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system In order to prevent anyone coming into con- tact with high voltage, the high-voltage electrical system is generally switched off automatically in the following cases: Rthe restraint systems are activated in the event of an accident Ran electrical short circuit is detected in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system Ran electrical connection in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system is discon- nected High-voltage battery G WARNING In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pressure of the high-voltage battery could exceed a critical value. In this case, flam- mable gas escapes through a vent valve in 26

Introduction.

the vehicle's underbody. The gas could

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 36 · Applies to: 453

ignite. There is a risk of injury. In cases of unusual smells developing, smoke or burn marks, stop the charging process immediately. Leave the danger area immediately. Secure the danger area at a suitable distance. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If the housing of the high-voltage battery has been damaged, electrolyte and gases may leak out. These are poisonous and caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or cloth- ing. Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes off with water and seek medical attention straight away. Correct use If warning stickers are removed, you may fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in place. The following are important sources of infor- mation in regard to vehicle use: Rsafety notes in this Owner's Manual Rtechnical data in this Owner's Manual Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Implied warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the smart implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. QR codes for rescue card The QR code is affixed on the charge socket flap and on the door pillar (B-pillar), on the opposite side. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly determine the corresponding rescue card for a vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about the vehicle in compact form, such as the routing of the electric cables. Further information: www.mercedes-benz.de/qr- code Data stored in the vehicle Electronic control units Your vehicle is equipped with electronic control units. Some of them are necessary for your vehicle to function safely, some provide support when driving (driver assistance systems). In addition, your vehicle offers comfort or entertainment functions which are also made possible with electronic con- trol units. Electronic control units contain data memo- ries which can permanently or temporarily store technical information on vehicle con- dition, component stress, service require- ments as well as technical incidents and faults. This information generally documents the condition of a component, a module, a system or of the environment such as: Roperating states of system components (e.g. fluid levels, battery status, tyre pres- sure) Rstatus messages of the vehicle or its indi- vidual components (e.g. wheel revolu- tions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, display of seat belts fastened) Rmalfunctions and defects in key system components (e.g. the lights and brakes) Rinformation on incidents in which the vehicle is damaged Rreactions of the systems in specific driv- ing situations (e.g. deployment of an air- bag, use of stability control systems) Rambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain sensor)

Introduction. 27 Z

In addition to the provision of control unit

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 37 · Applies to: 453

functions, this data serves to detect and rec- tify faults as well as to optimise vehicle functions by the manufacturer. Most of this data is volatile and is only processed in the vehicle itself. Only a small proportion of the data is stored in event or error memories. When service work is carried out on your vehicle, the technical data from the vehicle can be read out by service network staff (e.g. workshops, manufacturers) or third parties (e.g. breakdown services). Service work is, for example, repair work, maintenance, war- ranty claims and quality assurance meas- ures. The data is read out via the legally pre- scribed connection for the diagnostics con- nection in the vehicle. The respective work- shop of service network or third parties col- lect, process and use the data. The data docu- ments technical states of the vehicle, help in finding errors and in improving quality and are transferred to the manufacturer if nec- essary. In addition, the manufacturer is sub- ject to product liability. For this purpose, the manufacturer requires technical data from vehicles. Error memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet during repairs or service work. Depending on the equipment selected, you can enter data in comfort and infotainment functions of the vehicle. This includes, for example: Rmultimedia data, such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated mul- timedia system Raddress book data for use in an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navi- gation system Rnavigation destinations entered Rdata on the use of Internet services This data can be saved locally in the vehicle or it is located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle (e.g. smartphone, USB memory stick or MP3 player). If this data is saved in the vehicle, you can delete it at any time. Transfer of this data to third par- ties only occurs at your request, especially as part of online services according to the settings you have selected. You can save comfort settings/individuali- sation in the vehicle and change them at any time. Depending on the equipment, these include, for example: Rsettings for seat and steering wheel posi- tions Rsuspension and air-conditioning settings Rindividualisation such as interior lighting If your vehicle is suitably equipped, you can connect your mobile phone or another mobile end device with the vehicle. You can operate these devices via the control elements inte- grated in the vehicle. Images and sound from the mobile phone can played back via the multimedia system. At the same time, certain information is transferred to your mobile phone. This includes, depending on the type of inte- gration, for example: Rgeneral vehicle status Rposition data This allows the use of selected mobile phone apps, e.g. navigation or music playback. There is no further interaction between mobile phone and vehicle; in particular there is no active access to vehicle data. The pro- vider of the app being used determines how the data may be further processed. Which settings you can adjust, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your mobile phone. Online services Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network con- nection, this will permit the exchange of data between your vehicle and further systems. The wireless network connection is enabled by a transmission and reception device belonging to the vehicle or via mobile end devices (e.g. mobile phones) you bring into the vehicle. Online functions can be used via this wireless network connection. These include online services and applications/ apps, which are provided by the manufac- turer or by other providers. Manufacturer's own services Regarding online services of the manufac- turer, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place (e.g. 28

Introduction.

Owner's Manual, the manufacturer's website)

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 38 · Applies to: 453

along with the relevant data protection information. Personal identification data may be used to provide online services. The data exchange for this takes place via a secure connection, e.g. with the manufactur- er's IT systems intended for the purpose. The collecting, processing, and use of personal identification data beyond the provision of services occurs exclusively on the basis of a legal permit or after due consent. Generally, you can enable or disable the services and functions (which sometimes have associated costs). In some cases, this also applies to the whole data connection of the vehicle. Excluded from this are special legally prescribed functions and services. Services of third parties If it is possible to use online services from other providers, these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. The manufac- turer has no influence on the contents exchanged whilst using these services. Please ask the respective service provider for details on the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data in the context of third party services. Copyright information Information on licenses of Free and Open- Source software used in the vehicle and the electronic components: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Introduction. 29 Z

Cockpit

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 39 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Charge level display 71 Power display 71 ; Instrument cluster 35 = Horn ? Instrument cluster multi- function lever 107 Windscreen wipers combi- nation switch 88 A Automatic locking feature 91 Hazard warning lamps 170 B Overhead control panel 33 C smart Audio-System 112 smart Media-System 120 Function Page D Climate control system control panel 94 E Ignition lock 66 F Control panel for: Lane Keeping Assist 74 Parking aid 102 Acoustic presence indica- tor 69 Headlamp range adjust- ment 87 G Lights combination switch 86 30 Cockpit

At a glance.

Multifunction steering wheel

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 40 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Colour display of the instrument cluster 106 Monochrome display of the instrument cluster 106 ; smart Audio-System 112 smart Media-System 120 = Only for instrument cluster with colour display: WX Adjusts the vol- ume 120 Switches voice-oper- ated control on or off and accepts or ends a call 120 ? ® Increases or stores the current speed 76 g Decreases current speed 76 Function Page A ° Calls up the last speed stored 76 B ± Interrupts cruise control or the limiter 76 C ¯ Activates cruise con- trol 76 ^ Deactivates cruise control or the limiter 76 È Activates limiter 76 D Only for instrument cluster with colour display: 9: Scrolls through menus 107 a Confirms the selec- tion 109 Multifunction steering wheel 31

At a glance.

Centre console with drawer

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 41 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Cup holders 148 Ashtray 97 ; Drawer 148 = Coin holder Opens and closes the fold- ing roof 93 ? Selector lever 68 A Parking brake 67 Function Page B Cigarette lighter 97 12 V socket 98 C smart Media-System: AUX port, USB port and SD card slot 120 D Cup holders 148 E Selector lever indicator 68 F ECO mode 70 32 Centre console with drawer

At a glance.

Overhead control panel

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 42 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Left-hand reading lamp 88 ; Interior lighting 88 = Right-hand reading lamp 88 Function Page ? PASSENGER AIRBAG indica- tor lamps 41 Rear seat belt status indi- cator 40 A Rear-view mirror 63 Overhead control panel 33

At a glance.

Door control panel

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 43 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Opens the door 91 ; Adjusts the exterior mir- rors 64 Function Page = Opens and closes the side windows 93 34 Door control panel

At a glance.

Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 44 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Speedometer ; Display = Warning and indicator lamps C Doors or tailgate 187 7 Seat belts 188 6 Restraint system 189 þ Drive diagnostics 192 J Brakes 191 ! ABS 195 ÷ ESP® 58 h Tyre pressure monitor 197 D Power steering 200 · Collision warning 200 ^ Active Brake Assist 57 Function Page à Lane Keeping Assist 201

12 V battery 203 R Rear foglamp 87 O Foglamps 87 K Main-beam headlamps 86 L Dipped-beam headlamps 86 T Side lamps 87 è Charging cable 192 ¯ Cruise control 202 È Limiter 202 b Brake lights, rain or light sensors 203 ¯ ° Next service due date 192 õ READY indicator 203 Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display 35

At a glance.

Occupant safety

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 45 · Applies to: 453

Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint sys- tem The restraint system comprises: RSeat belt system RAirbags RChild restraint system RChild seat securing systems In the event of an accident, the restraint sys- tem can: Rreduce the risk of vehicle occupants com- ing into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. Rreduce the forces to which vehicle occu- pants are subjected Only a seat belt which is worn correctly can provide the intended level of protection. The belt tensioners and/or airbags can comple- ment a correctly worn seat belt depending on the detected accident situation. Belt ten- sioners and airbags are not necessarily deployed in every accident. For the restraint system to provide its full protection, each occupant has to: Rhave the seat belt fastened correctly Rbe in an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest Rsit with their feet resting on the floor, if possible Rif below 1.50 m in height, be secured using an additional restraint system suitable for your vehicle However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, seat belts and airbags generally do not pro- tect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. The risk of an injury result- ing from airbag deployment cannot be ruled out entirely either. Limited protection from restraint system G WARNING If the restraint system is modified, it may no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function by failing in an acci- dent or triggering unexpectedly, for exam- ple. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. If it is necessary to adjust the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a qualified specialist workshop. smart recommends that you use driving aids which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by smart. Preparing the restraint system for oper- ation When the ignition is switched on, the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up during the self-check. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is star- ted. The components of the restraint system are then ready for operation. Restraint system malfunctions RThe restraint system warning lamp 6 does not light up when the ignition is switched on. RThe restraint system warning lamp 6 is constantly lit or lights up repeatedly when driving. In the event of an accident, the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may not be deactivated as intended if there is a mal- function in the restraint system. G DANGER If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be trig- gered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example. Furthermore, in the event of an accident, the vehicle's high-voltage elec- trical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may be electrocuted if you touch the damaged components of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. 36 Occupant safety

Safety.

This poses an increased risk of injury or

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 46 · Applies to: 453

even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. After an accident, switch off the ignition immediately and remove the key from the ignition lock. Restraint system response during an accident How the restraint system works depends on the severity of the impact detected and the apparent type of accident: Rhead-on collision Rrear collision Rside impact Roverturn1 The activation threshold for the restraint system components is determined based on the analysis of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering proc- ess of the restraint system components should take place in good time at the start of the collision. Factors which can only be seen and meas- ured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an air- bag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If, for instance, very rigid car parts such as longi- tudinal body members are hit, the rate of vehicle deceleration may be sufficient. The restraint system components can be activated or triggered independently of each other: Components Detected trigger sit- uation Belt tensioners Frontal collision, rear collision, side impact, overturn1 Driver's airbag, front passenger front airbag and knee airbag Head-on collision Sidebag Side impact Windowbag Side impact, over- turn1, frontal colli- sion G WARNING After the airbag deploys, the airbag parts are hot. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the airbag parts. Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. i smart recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a belt tensioner was triggered or an airbag was deployed. If the belt tensioners are triggered or an air- bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: Rthe bang will not usually affect your hear- ing. Rin general, the powder released is not haz- ardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary condi- tions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehi- cle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. 1 Only for certain countries. Occupant safety 37

Safety. Z

Seat belts

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 47 · Applies to: 453

Protection provided by seat belts Always fasten seat belts correctly before commencing your journey. A seat belt can only provide maximum protection when worn correctly. G WARNING If the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it can- not perform its intended protective func- tion. Furthermore, an incorrectly worn seat belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Always observe the notes on correct driver's seat position (Y page 60) and seat adjust- ment (Y page 61). Every car occupant must observe the follow- ing notes to ensure a properly worn seat belt can provide full protection. RThe seat belt must: - not be twisted and must be tight and fit snugly across your body - be routed across the centre of the shoul- der and as low down across your hips as possible Rthe shoulder section of the belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. Ravoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Rpress the lap belt down into your hip joints and pull taut by the shoulder section of the belt. The lap belt must never be routed across your stomach or abdomen. Rnever route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile objects. Ronly one person per seat belt. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. Rnever secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the notes on "Loading the vehicle" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 149). Also make sure that objects are never placed between an occupant and the seat, e.g. a cushion. If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 42). Limited protection from seat belts G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an acci- dent, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat- belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. G WARNING Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly without an additional suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. Further- more, an incorrectly worn seat belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in additional suitable restraint systems. 38 Occupant safety

Safety.

G WARNING

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 48 · Applies to: 453

Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if: Rthey are damaged, have been modified, are extremely dirty, bleached or dyed Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rmodifications have been made to the belt tensioners, belt anchorages or inertia reels Seat belts may sustain non-visible dam- age in an accident, e.g. due to glass splint- ers. Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or fail, for example in the event of an accident. Modified seat belt tensioners may be deployed unintentionally or not function as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify seat belts, seat belt tension- ers, seat belt anchorages and inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not damaged or worn and are clean. After an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. smart recommends that you only use seat belts that have been approved specifically for your vehicle by smart. G WARNING Pyrotechnical belt tensioners which have been triggered are no longer operational and therefore cannot protect as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, pos- sibly even fatal. Have pyrotechnic belt tensioners which have been triggered replaced at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. smart recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam- aged seat belts can no longer fulfil their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Fastening and adjusting the seat belts If the seat belt is pulled quickly or suddenly, the inertia reel locks. The belt strap cannot be pulled out further. ! If the co-driver's seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the co-driver's seat. Otherwise, in the event of an accident the belt ten- sioner could be triggered in addition to other systems and would need to be replaced. X Always insert seat belt tongue ; into belt buckle : that belongs to the seat. X Slide the belt sash guide into the required position. To raise: slide upwards at the ring. To lower: press the belt guide release and slide downwards at the ring. X Make sure that the belt sash guide is engaged. Releasing the seat belts X Press the release button in the belt buckle and guide the seat belt back by the belt tongue. Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster reminds you that all vehicle occupants must fasten their seat belts correctly. A warning tone may also sound. Occupant safety 39

Safety. Z

As soon as the driver and co-driver fasten

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 49 · Applies to: 453

their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes

out.

Rear seat belt status indicator

Seat belt warning lamp ; Rear left-hand seat belt status indicator = Rear right-hand seat belt status indica- tor The rear seat belt status indicator informs you which rear seat belt is not fastened. You will recognise the status of the rear seat belt from the following colour: RRed – seat belt not fastened RGreen – seat belt fastened When you drive off and have reached a speed of approximately 10 km/h the lamps go out after approximately 30 seconds. Airbags Overview of airbags The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. When deployed, an airbag may increase pro- tection for the corresponding vehicle occu- pant. AIRBAG Possible protection for: : Driver's kneebag Thigh, knee, lower leg ; Driver's air- bag Head and thorax = Front passenger front airbag Head and thorax ? Windowbag Head A Sidebag Thorax and pelvis The front passenger front airbag can be deployed in an accident only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure both before and during the journey that the status of the front passenger front airbag is correct (Y page 41). Protection provided by the airbags Depending on the accident situation, an air- bag supplements a correctly worn seat belt and can increase protection. G WARNING If you deviate from the correct seat posi- tion, the airbag cannot perform its inten- ded protective function and can even cause additional injuries when deployed. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. In order to avoid such risks, always ensure that all vehicle occupants: Rfasten their seatbelts correctly, includ- ing pregnant women Rare seated correctly and maintain the furthest possible distance from the air- bags Robserve the following notes Always ensure that there are no objects located between the airbag and the vehicle occupant. 40 Occupant safety

Safety.

To avoid risks resulting from a deployed air-

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 50 · Applies to: 453

bag: Radjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Move the driver's and co- driver's seats as far back as possible Always observe the information on the correct driver's seat position (Y page 60). Rhold the steering wheel by the rim only. This allows the airbag to deploy fully Ralways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. Otherwise, you are in the airbags' deployment area Rfeet should always be placed on the ground. Do not place your feet on the dash- board, for example. Otherwise, your feet are in the airbag's deployment area Rwhen travelling with children in the vehi- cle, observe the additional notes (Y page 42) Ralways stow objects correctly and securely Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly. Therefore, always make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and the airbag Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar Rthere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hang- ers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks Rthere are no accessories, such as drinks can holders, attached in the airbag's deployment area, e.g. on doors, side win- dows or side trim panels Rthere are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Stow such objects in a suitable place Limited protection from airbags G WARNING If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an airbag cover or affix objects to it. G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even prevent deployment of the airbags integrated into the seats. The airbags may then fail to protect the vehicle occupants as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Use only seat covers which have been spe- cifically approved for the respective seat by smart. G WARNING Sensors to control the airbags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not per- formed correctly to the doors or door pan- elling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occu- pants as they are designed to do. This poses an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door panelling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING An airbag that has been deployed once cannot provide any further protection and, in the event of an accident, can no longer perform its intended protective function. There is an increased risk of injury. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified spe- cialist workshop to have the deployed air- bag replaced. Have deployed airbags replaced immedi- ately. Status of the front passenger front airbag PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps The front passenger front airbag can be ena- bled or disabled using the airbag-off switch in the instrument panel on the front passenger side (Y page 51). Occupant safety 41

Safety. Z

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 51 · Applies to: 453

AIR BAG ON indicator lamps are part of the front passenger front airbag deactivation system. The indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger front airbag: RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front passenger front airbag is deactiva- ted. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front passenger front airbag is activated. The front passenger front airbag may deploy during an accident. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure that the status of the front passenger front airbag is correct depending on the sit- uation both before and during the journey: RChildren in a child restraint system: whether the front passenger front airbag should be enabled or disabled depends on the child restraint system fitted and the age and size of the child. Be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 42). There, you will also find information on rearward- or forward- facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat. RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp must be lit. The front passenger front airbag is activated. Be sure to read the notes on "Seat belts" (Y page 38) and "Airbags" (Y page 40). There, you can also find information on the correct seat position. Observe the information on the airbag deac- tivation system of the front passenger front airbag (Y page 51). Travelling safely with children in the vehicle Observe carefully when children trav- elling in the vehicle Being consistent i Be sure to observe the safety notes rele- vant to the situation. In doing so, you will be able to identify possible risks and avoid dangers when children are travelling in the vehicle (Y page 43). Bear in mind that negligence when securing the child in the child restraint system may have serious consequences. Always be con- sistent and secure a child carefully before each journey. To improve protection for children younger than twelve years old and under 1.50 m in height, smart recommends you always observe the following notes: RAlways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for your smart vehicle. RThe child restraint system must be appro- priate to the age, weight and size of the child. RThe vehicle seat must be suitable for the child restraint system to be fitted (Y page 46). Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are safer than chil- dren secured on the front seats. For this rea- son, smart strongly advises that you fit a child restraint system on a rear seat. The generic term child restraint system The generic term child restraint system is used in this Owner's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example: Ra baby car seat Ra rearward-facing child seat Ra forward-facing child seat Ra child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guides The child restraint system must be appro- priate to the age, weight and size of the child. 42 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

Safety.

Observing laws and regulations

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 52 · Applies to: 453

Be sure to observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle. Ensure that the child restraint system is approved in accordance with the valid test specifications and guidelines. Further infor- mation can be obtained at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. smart recommends that you use a smart Centre. Use only approved child restraint sys- tems Only child restraint systems that meet the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle: RUN-R44 RUN-R129 (i‑Size child restraint systems) Information about the approval categories for child restraint systems and details on the approval label on the child restraint system (Y page 46). Detecting risks, avoiding danger Securing systems for child restraint sys- tems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: Rthe ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings Rthe vehicle's seat belt system RTop Tether anchorages Preferably, fit an ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint system. The risk of incorrectly fitting the child restraint system can be reduced by simply fitting it on the securing rings of the vehicle. When the child is secured using the safety belt integrated in the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system, be sure to observe the max- imum permissible weight of the child and child restraint system together (Y page 49). The advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system Babies or infants should preferably travel in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child is seated in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and is facing backwards. Babies and infants have comparatively poorly developed neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. A rear- ward-facing child restraint system can reduce the risk of injury to the cervical spine in an accident. Secure the child restraint system cor- rectly at all times G WARNING If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted on the seat position suitable for this purpose, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use for the child restraint system. Make sure that the entire surface of the child restraint system is resting on the seat surface. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. G WARNING If the child restraint system is fitted incor- rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always fit child restraint systems prop- erly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. RBe sure to observe the installation and operating instructions provided by the Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 43

Safety. Z

manufacturer for the child restraint sys-

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 53 · Applies to: 453

tem being used as well as the vehicle-spe- cific notes at all times: - Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system to the rear seat (Y page 49). - Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (Y page 54). - Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (Y page 55). Observe the specific notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure that the status of the front passenger front airbag is correct depending on the situation both before and during the journey. RObserve the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. RAlso secure Top Tether, if available. Do not modify the child restraint system G WARNING If you modify a child restraint system or affix objects to it, e.g. toys or unsuitable accessories, the child restraint system may no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. Never modify a child restraint system. Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer. smart recommends you use smart care prod- ucts to clean child restraint systems recom- mended by smart. Only use child restraint systems which are not damaged G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems that have been damaged or sub- jected to a load in an accident cannot per- form their intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Immediately replace child restraint sys- tems that have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident. Have the child restraint securing systems checked in a qualified specialist workshop before fit- ting a child restraint system again. Avoiding direct sunlight G WARNING If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become very hot. Children could be suffer burns by touching these parts, in particular on the metallic parts of the child restraint sys- tem. There is a risk of injury. If you and your child leave the vehicle, always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave chil- dren unattended in the vehicle. Observe the following when stopping or parking G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. 44 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

Safety.

G WARNING

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 54 · Applies to: 453

If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (par- ticularly children) unattended in the vehi- cle. Overview of recommended child restraint systems The smart forfour is equipped with a manual front passenger front airbag deactivation sys- tem. X Before using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, disable the front passenger front airbag (Y page 51). i You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from a quali- fied specialist workshop. smart recommends that you use a smart Centre. Securing with ISOFIX Weight group Size class Model2 Approval number Order number3 Group 0+: up to 13 kg and up to approx- imately 15 months Size category E BABY SAFE plus E1 04 301 146 B6 6 86 8224 Group I: 9–18 kg Size category B1 DUO plus E1 04 301 133 A 000 970 17 02 Securing with the vehicle seat belt Weight group Type2 Approval number Order number3 Group 0: up to 10 kg and up to approx- imately 6 months BABY SAFE plus II E1 04 301 146 A 000 970 13 02 Group 0+: up to 13 kg and up to approx- imately 15 months BABY SAFE plus II E1 04 301 146 A 000 970 13 02 Group I: 9–18 kg and from approx- imately 9 months to 4 years DUO plus E1 04 301 133 A 000 970 17 02 2 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 3 With colour code 9H95. Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 45

Safety. Z

Weight group

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 55 · Applies to: 453

Type2 Approval number Order number3 Group II/III: 15–36 kg and from approx- imately 4–12 years KIDFIX E1 04 301 198 A 000 970 20 02 Group II/III: 15–36 kg and from approx- imately 4–12 years KIDFIX XP E1 04 301 304 A 000 970 23 02 Suitable seats in the vehicle for installing a child restraint system Securing systems for child restraint systems Vehicle seat

Left/right rear seat Preferred securing system: ISOFIX child seat securing system (Y page 48) or i‑Size child seat securing system (Y page 49) Also secure Top Tether if available (Y page 51) Alternative securing sys- tem: RVehicle seat belt (Y page 53) Front passenger seat Securing system: RVehicle seat belt (Y page 53) Be sure to observe: RIf the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure that the status of the front passenger front airbag is correct depending on the situa- tion both before and during the journey. Permitted categories for child restraint systems Use only approved child restraint sys- tems Only child restraint systems that meet the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle: RUN-R44 RUN-R129 (i‑Size child restraint systems) Identification on the child restraint sys- tem Information about the approval category, weight category and approval number, for example, is on the approval label on the child restraint system. Depending on the approval category of the child restraint system, there may be further information, e.g. the ISOFIX size category. 2 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 3 With colour code 9H95. 46 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

Safety.

Approval categories in accordance with

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 56 · Applies to: 453

UN-R44 Example of an approval label RUniversal: child restraint systems in the "Universal" category are approved for installation in vehicles. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suit- ability of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled U, UF or IUF. The designation IUF refers to an ISOFIX child restraint system in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or a supporting bracket. RSemi-Universal: child restraint systems in the "semi-universal" category may only be used if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. RVehicle-specific: child restraint systems in the "vehicle-specific" category may only be used if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system man- ufacturer's vehicle model list. Approval categories in accordance with UN-R129 Example of an approval label Ri‑Size: child restraint systems in the "i‑Size" category are approved for instal- lation in vehicles with i‑Size securing rings. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suitability of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled i-U. The designation i-U refers to an i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or a supporting bracket. Observe the suitability of vehicle seats Depending on the approval category, there are forward-facing and/or rearward-facing child restraint systems. Usage may be limi- ted for certain vehicle seats. RSuitability of seats for securing ISOFIX child restraint systems (Y page 48) RSuitability of seats for securing i-Size child restraint systems (Y page 49) RSuitability of seats for securing a belt- secured child restraint system (Y page 53) Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 47

Safety. Z

Securing the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 57 · Applies to: 453

Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems ISOFIX identification ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for special restraint systems. RThis symbol indicates which seats are suitable for securing an ISOFIX child restraint system in accordance with UN-R44. ROnly secure child restraint systems approved by UN-R44 in accordance with the following ISOFIX tables. Carry cot Size class Equipment Left/right rear seat F ISO/L1 X G ISO/L2 X X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight category and/or size category. Weight category 0 (up to 10 kg and up to approximately 6 months) Size class Equipment Left/right rear seat E ISO/R1 IL IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in accordance with the table in "Over- view of recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approximately 15 months) Size class Equipment Left/right rear seat E ISO/R1 IL D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 X IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in accordance with the table in "Over- view of recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight category and/or size category. 48 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

Safety.

Weight category I (9‑18 kg and approximately 9 months to 4 years)

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 58 · Applies to: 453

Size class Equipment Left/right rear seat D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 X B ISO/F2 IUF B1 ISO/F2X IUF A ISO/F3 IUF IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in accordance with the table in "Over- view of recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight category and/or size category. IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems in the "Universal" category in this weight category. Suitability of the seats for attaching i‑Size child restraint systems i‑Size identification i‑Size is a standardised securing system for special restraint systems. RThis symbol indicates which seats are suitable for securing an i‑Size child restraint system in accordance with UN-R129. RChild restraint systems which have been approved in accordance with the following may be secured: - UN-R44 in accordance with the ISOFIX tables (Y page 48) - UN-R129 in accordance with the following i‑Size table Front passenger seat Left/right rear seat i‑Size child restraint system X i‑U X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight category and/or size category. i-U Suitable for forward-facing and rearward-facing i‑Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. Installing an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system on the rear seat G WARNING For ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint sys- tems, where the child is secured using the integrated seat belt of the child restraint system, the permissible gross weight of the child and the child restraint system is 33 kg. If the child together with the child restraint system weighs more than 33 kg, ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint systems with integrated seat belt no longer offer sufficient protection. ISOFIX or i‑Size child seat securing systems may be overloaded and will not be able to restrain the child, for example, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 49

Safety. Z

If the child together with the child

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 59 · Applies to: 453

restraint system weighs more than 33 kg ,

only use ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint

systems with which the child is secured

with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the

child restraint system with the Top Tether

belt, if available.

Always observe the information on the

weight of the child restraint system:

Rin the installation and operating instruc-

tions provided by the manufacturer for the

child restraint system being used

Ron the label of the child restraint system, if

present

Regularly check that the maximum permis-

sible weight of the child and child restraint

system together is still complied with.

When fitting a child restraint system, be sure

to observe the following:

O Be sure to observe the correct use and

the suitability of seats for securing a

child restraint system.

ISOFIX child seat securing system

(Y page 48)

i‑Size child seat securing system

(Y page 49)

O Be sure to observe the installation and

operating instructions provided by the

manufacturer for the child restraint

system being used.

O Make sure that the child's feet do not

touch the front seat. If necessary, move

the front seat forwards slightly.

When fitting an ISOFIX child restraint

system, also observe the following:

O When using a category 0/0+ baby car seat

and a category I, rearward-facing child

restraint system on a rear seat: adjust

the front seat so that the seat does not

touch the child restraint system.

O For certain child restraint systems in

weight category II or III, there may be

restrictions on the maximum size set-

ting, e.g. due to possible contact with the

roof.

O The child restraint system must not be

put under strain between the roof and

the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing

the wrong direction.

O The child restraint system must not be

put under strain by the head restraint.

Adjust the head restraints as appropri-

ate.

When fitting an i-Size child restraint

system, also observe the following:

O When using a rearward-facing child

restraint system: adjust the front seat so

that it does not touch the child restraint

system.

O When using a forward-facing child

restraint system: remove the head

restraint from the respective seat, if

possible. In addition, the seat backrest

of the child restraint system must, as far

as possible, lie flat against the backrest

of the vehicle seat.

ISOFIX securing rings ; i-Size securing rings Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system or the i-Size child restraint system is engaged correctly in both ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings. 50 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

Safety.

X Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys-

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 60 · Applies to: 453

tem on both securing rings of the vehicle. Securing Top Tether G WARNING If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always lock rear seat backrests after fit- ting a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjust the rear seat backrests so that they are in an upright position. Ensure that the red lock verification indica- tor on the loop at the top of the rear bench seat is no longer visible. If the child restraint system is equip- ped with a Top Tether belt: Top Tether can reduce the risk of injury. The Top Tether belt provides an additional con- nection between the child restraint system secured with ISOFIX or i-Size and the vehicle. Top Tether anchorage : is fitted to the lug- gage compartment floor behind each rear seat. X Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys- tem with Top Tether. Be sure to comply with the child restraint system manufac- turer's installation instructions when doing so. X Move the head restraint upwards. X Guide Top Tether belt = under the head restraint between the two head restraint bars. X Guide Top Tether belt = between the backrest and parcel shelf into the luggage compartment. Remove the parcel shelf if necessary (Y page 149). X Hook Top Tether hook ; of Top Tether belt = into Top Tether anchorage :. Lift up the carpet a little if necessary. Ensure that: RTop Tether hook ; is hooked into Top Tether anchorage : as shown RTop Tether belt = is not twisted RTop Tether belt = is routed between the backrest and the parcel shelf if the par- cel shelf is fitted X Tension Top Tether belt =. Be sure to com- ply with the child restraint system man- ufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X If necessary, move the head restraint back down again slightly. Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt =. Disabling or enabling the front passenger front airbag G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air- Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 51

Safety. Z

bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 61 · Applies to: 453

the event of an accident and cannot per- form its intended protective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the per- son is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. You may only transport a child on the front-passenger seat if they are seated in a suitable rearward or forward- facing child restraint system. Always observe the information about suitable positioning of the child restraint system in this Owner's Manual as well as the child restraint system manufacturer's installa- tion instructions. G WARNING If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit, the front- passenger front airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child can occur. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not fit a rear- ward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Further information can be found under "Problems with the front passenger front airbag shutoff" (Y page 189). G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat and you position the front- passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON is lit up This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- wards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the informa- tion in this Owner's Manual on suitable positioning of the child restraint system in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system If you use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, you must disable the front passenger front airbag. 52 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

Safety.

Airbag-off switch :, to enable and disable

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 62 · Applies to: 453

the front passenger front airbag manually, is in the dashboard on the front passenger side. X Press front passenger front airbag-off switch : in beyond the point of resist- ance. X To disable the front passenger front airbag: turn airbag-off switch : anti-clockwise. The 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica- tor lamp on the overhead control panel lights up and remains lit up continuously when the ignition is switched on (Y page 41). X To enable the front passenger front airbag: turn airbag-off switch : clockwise. The × PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp on the overhead control panel lights up and remains lit up continuously when the ignition is switched on (Y page 41). The front passenger front airbag is generally enabled when the ignition is switched on, except when the front passenger front airbag has been disabled manually. When the front passenger front airbag is disabled, the 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp on the overhead control panel (Y page 41) lights up continuously when the ignition is switched on. Attaching a child restraint system with the seat belt Notes on the suitability of the seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint sys- tems Rear seats Weight group Left/right rear seat Group 0: up to 10 kg U, L Group 0+: up to 13 kg U, L Group I: 9 to 18 kg U, L Group II: 15 to 25 kg U, L Group III: 22 to 36 kg U, L U Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category in this weight category. L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems in accordance with the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 53

Safety. Z

Front passenger seat – notes

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 63 · Applies to: 453

Notes on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat RIf circumstances require you to fit a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, be sure to observe the notes on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (Y page 55). Observe the specific notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint sys- tems. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure that the status of the front passenger front airbag is correct depending on the situation both before and during the journey. Weight group Front passenger front airbag is enabled Front passenger front airbag is disabled1 1 The vehicle is equipped with a front passenger front airbag deactivation sys- tem. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp must be lit. Group 0: up to 10 kg X U, L Group 0+: up to 13 kg X U, L Group I: 9 to 18 kg UF, L U, L Group II: 15 to 25 kg UF, L U, L Group III: 22 to 36 kg U, L U, L X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight category and/or size category. UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems in the "Universal" cat- egory in this weight category. U Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category in this weight category. L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems in accordance with the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Attaching a child restraint system with the seat belt to the rear seat When fitting a belt-secured child restraint system, observe the following: O Be sure to observe the installation and operating instructions provided by the manufacturer for the child restraint system being used. O When using a "Universal" or "Semi-Uni- versal" category child restraint system, ensure that it is approved for the vehicle seat. Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats for securing belt-secured child restraint systems" (Y page 53). O When using a category 0/0+ baby car seat and a category I, rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. O The backrest of a forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, rest flat against the backrest of the rear seat. O For certain child restraint systems in weight category II or III, there may be 54 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

Safety.

restrictions on the maximum size set-

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 64 · Applies to: 453

ting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. If possible, adjust the seat cushion angle as appropriate. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropri- ate. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat forwards slightly. X Fit the child restraint system. The base of the child restraint system must lie fully on the front passenger seat cush- ion. X Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. Notes on rearward and forward facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat G WARNING If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front- passenger front airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child can occur. Observe the specific notes on rearward- facing and forward-facing child restraint systems. Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: always pay attention to the status of the front passenger front airbag. RIf circumstances require you to fit a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, be sure to observe the notes on disa- bling the front passenger front airbag. RWhen using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger front airbag must always be deactivated. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp is lit continuously. RIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out, the front passenger front airbag is activated. The front passenger front airbag may deploy during an acci- dent. Attaching a child restraint system with the seat belt to the front passenger seat When fitting a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following: O Be sure to observe the installation and operating instructions provided by the manufacturer for the child restraint system being used. O When using a "Universal" or "Semi-Uni- versal" category child restraint system, ensure that it is approved for the vehicle seat. Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats for securing belt-secured child restraint systems" (Y page 53). Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 55

Safety. Z

O The backrest of a forward-facing child

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 65 · Applies to: 453

restraint system must, as far as possible, rest flat against the backrest of the front passenger seat. O For certain child restraint systems in weight category II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size set- ting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. O Never place objects, such as cushions, under or behind the child restraint sys- tem. X Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible. X Adjust the seat backrest to an almost ver- tical position. X Fit the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint sys- tem must always rest on the seat cushion of the front passenger seat. X Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. X If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat as appropriate. Pets in the vehicle G WARNING If you leave animals unsupervised or unsecured in the vehicle, they may press buttons or switches, for instance. In this way, animals may: Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Rswitch systems on or off and thereby endanger other road users Furthermore, unsecured animals may be flung around inside the vehicle in the event of an accident or abrupt steering or braking manoeuvre, and thereby injure vehicle occupants. There is a risk of acci- dent and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals properly when driving, for instance with a suitable pet carrier. Driving safely Driving safety system limitations ! Make sure you have suitable tyres, so that assistance systems and driving safety systems can work as effectively as possible. If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by smart. Further information can be obtained at a smart centre or a qualified specialist work- shop. Braking with ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. When you switch on the ignition, the ! warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. It goes out after the engine is star- ted. 56 Driving safely

Safety.

ABS works from a speed of about 6 km/h,

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 66 · Applies to: 453

regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS intervenes in the case of slippery road sur- faces, even when you only brake gently. X To brake while ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety sys- tems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Using Active Brake Assist Useful information With the help of the radar sensor system, Active Brake Assist can calculate the dis- tance of your vehicle to the vehicle travelling in front. If for several seconds, the distance to the vehicle ahead is insufficient for the speed you are driving at, Active Brake Assist alerts the driver visually. If a risk of collision is detected, Active Brake Assist alerts the driver both visually and acoustically. In addition, Active Brake Assist prepares the vehicle for a possible emer- gency braking manoeuvre. In particularly critical situations Active Brake Assist may brake autonomously. In this case, Active Brake Assist continues to alert the driver both visually and acousti- cally. Please note G WARNING Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa- tions. In these cases, Active Brake Assist may: Rwarn or brake for no reason Rnot issue a warning Rnot brake There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. Be prepared to brake or manoeuvre if necessary. G WARNING Active Brake Assist does not react: Rto persons, bicycles, motorcycles or ani- mals Rto approaching vehicles Rto cross traffic Ron bends As a result, Active Brake Assist cannot intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be prepared to brake. G WARNING Severe jolting, for example in the case of a collision, may cause the radar sensors to be misaligned. The function of Active Brake Assist is then impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Deactivate Active Brake Assist. Have Active Brake Assist checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. The following requirements must also be ful- filled: Rthe selector lever is in position h. Rthe parking brake is released. Rthe driving speed is within the suitable speed range. Detection can be restricted under the follow- ing conditions: Rthe vehicle is new or service work has been carried out on the system. In this case, Driving safely 57

Safety. Z

observe the information on running-in the

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 67 · Applies to: 453

vehicle. Rthe radio sensors are dirty or covered (Y page 166) Rin heavy rain or snow Rthere is interference from other radar sources, e.g. in multi-storey car parks Rthe vehicle travelling in front is narrow, e.g. a motorcycle Rthe vehicle travelling in front is travelling on a different line Autonomous braking can be cancelled by briefly depressing the accelerator pedal. If the brake lamps are inoperative, deacti- vate Active Brake Assist. i Observe the notes on "Limitations of the driving safety systems" (Y page 56). Distance warning and forward collision warning with autonomous braking func- tion Method of operation If the distance maintained to the vehicle ahead is insufficient for the speed you are driving at, the · warning lamp lights up. If Active Brake Assist detects a risk of colli- sion while driving, the · warning lamp lights up and a warning tone sounds. If the driver depresses the brake pedal fast, the braking pressure may be increased to a full brake application. The autonomous braking function may inter- vene if the driver does not react to the forward collision warning. When driving at speeds of more than 30 km/h, the forward collision warning may issue a warning in the following situations: Situation Speed you are trav- elling Vehicles travelling ahead 30 - 140 km/h Vehicles coming to a standstill 30 - 140 km/h Stationary vehicles 30 - 80 km/h Other objects or crossing vehicles No warning possible When driving at speeds of more than 30 km/h, the autonomous braking function may inter- vene in the following situations: Situation Speed you are trav- elling Vehicles travelling ahead 30 - 140 km/h Vehicles coming to a standstill 30 - 140 km/h Stationary vehicles No intervention possible Other objects or crossing vehicles No intervention possible Activating or deactivating Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist is automatically activa- ted when you start the engine. Monochrome display: activating/deactivat- ing Active Brake Assist using the on-board computer (Y page 109). Colour display: activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist using the on-board com- puter (Y page 110). Adaptive brake lamps The adaptive brake lights warn following traffic in an emergency situation: If you brake the vehicle sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h the brake lamps flash rapidly. If the vehicle is sharply braked to a standstill at a speed of over 70 km/h, the hazard warn- ing lamps are also switched on automati- cally. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if you subsequently drive faster than 10 km/h. Driving with ESP® If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. ESP® supports the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also sta- 58 Driving safely

Safety.

bilise the vehicle during braking. ESP® com-

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 68 · Applies to: 453

prises ETS (Electronic Traction System) and Crosswind Assist. ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away or accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. Strong crosswind gusts can impair the road- holding of your vehicle when driving straight ahead. Crosswind Assist reduces these impairments. Crosswind assist is active at vehicle speeds above 70 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering gently. If ESP® intervenes, pull away carefully and adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. If the ÷ warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP® is active. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Information on EBD (Electronic Brake- force Distribution) EBD monitors and controls the brake pres- sure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an acci- dent. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling character- istics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safely 59

Safety. Z

Understanding functions of the key

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 69 · Applies to: 453

% Unlocks the vehicle

; º Opens the tailgate (press and hold)

= & Locks the vehicle

% Unlocks the vehicle ; & Locks the vehicle = é Opens the tailgate (press and hold) X To unlock centrally: press the % button. The turn signals flash once. i After unlocking, open the vehicle within approximately two minutes to prevent it from locking itself and priming the anti- theft alarm system again. X To unlock and open the tailgate: press and hold the º or é button. X To lock centrally: press the & button. The turn signals flash twice. X To activate the double-lock function (for United Kingdom only): press the & but- ton twice. The turn signals flash twice slowly and three times quickly. Opening the door X Press the # button on the key. X Open the door. i After unlocking, open the vehicle within approximately two minutes to prevent it from locking itself and priming the anti- theft alarm system again. Correct driver's seat position G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine. Observe the following rules on the correct driver's seat position: Rthe driver must be as far away from the driver's airbag as possible (Y page 40). Rthe driver must be wearing seat belt = properly. Rthe driver must be able to depress the ped- als properly. Rthe driver must be able to move their legs freely. Rthe driver must be able to reach steering wheel : with their arms slightly bent. 60 Correct driver's seat position

Entering and setting up.

Rthe driver must be able to see all the dis-

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 70 · Applies to: 453

plays in the instrument cluster clearly. Rmove seat backrest ; to an almost vertical position. Rsit in a normal upright position. Rthe seat belt must fit snugly across your body. Rthe seat belt must be routed across the middle of your shoulder. Rthe seat belt must be routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints. Radjust the rear-view and exterior mirrors so that the driver has a good view of the road and traffic. Adjusting the seats Please note G WARNING If children adjust the seats, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the driver's seat is not correctly engaged, it could unexpectedly move while driving. This could cause you to lose con- trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always ensure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. G WARNING When adjusting a seat, you or another vehicle occupant could become trapped by the guide rail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat when adjusting it. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an acci- dent, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat- belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. G WARNING The steering wheel may move unexpect- edly if you adjust it while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehi- cle. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel is locked before driving off. Never unlock the steer- ing wheel when the vehicle is in motion. G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be dam- aged. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" (Y page 40) and "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 42). Adjusting the seats 61

Entering and setting up. Z

Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft posi-

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 71 · Applies to: 453

tion Seat with a lever Seat with a handwheel To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position, the seat belt must not be fastened. X Lift lever =. X Slide the seat forwards or backwards. The seat engages audibly. Adjusting the seat hight (seat with a lever only) X Pull handle ; up or push it down several times. Adjusting the seat backrest (seat with a lever) X Pull lever : upwards. X At the same time, move the backrest for- wards or backwards. Adjusting the seat backrest (seat with a handwheel) X Turn handwheel ? forwards or back- wards. Adjusting the steering wheel G WARNING The steering wheel may move unexpect- edly if you adjust it while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehi- cle. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel is locked before driving off. Never unlock the steer- ing wheel when the vehicle is in motion. G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING Children could become trapped by the steering wheel if they adjust it. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. 62 Adjusting the steering wheel

Entering and setting up.

X Fold down lever :.

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 72 · Applies to: 453

X Set desired steering wheel height 2. X Fold up lever :. X Check that the steering column is locked. Adjusting the mirrors Adjusting the interior mirror X Move the interior mirror up, down, left or right. Manually setting the interior mirror to anti-dazzle mode X Fold lever : forwards. Understanding automatic anti-dazzle mode of interior mirror Please note G WARNING Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irrita- tion. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the electro- lyte, observe the following: RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin immediately with water. RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of your eyes thoroughly with clean water. RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immedi- ately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with elec- trolyte. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek med- ical attention immediately. Useful information The interior mirror automatically goes into anti-dazzle mode if simultaneously: Rthe ignition is switched on Rincident light from headlamps hits the sensor in the interior mirror The interior mirror does not go into anti- dazzle mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Adjusting the mirrors 63

Entering and setting up. Z

Adjusting the exterior mirrors man-

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 73 · Applies to: 453

ually G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects visible in the mirrors are closer than they appear. You could mis- judge the distance from road users driving behind you when changing lanes, for instance. There is a risk of an accident. You should therefore always look over your shoulder to determine the actual distance from road users driving behind you. X Move lever : up, down, left or right. Adjusting the exterior mirrors electri- cally In order to adjust the exterior mirrors elec- trically, the ignition must be switched on. X To select the left or right exterior mirror: turn control = left 1 or right 2. X To adjust the exterior mirrors: move con- trol = up, down, left or right. Adjusting head restraints in the rear compartment Please note G WARNING The head restraints cannot provide the intended protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk of injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or sudden braking, for example. Always drive with the head restraints fit- ted. Ensure that the centre of the head restraints support the back of each vehicle occupant's head at eye level before driving off. Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height and angle of the head restraints to the correct position. Raising the head restraints in the rear X Pull the head restraint up until it engages. 64 Adjusting head restraints in the rear compartment

Entering and setting up.

Lowering the head restraints in the

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 74 · Applies to: 453

rear X Press release button :. X Push the head restraint down. Using the armrest Please note ! Do not lean on the armrest with full force or it could become damaged. Using the armrest 65

Entering and setting up. Z

Starting the engine

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 75 · Applies to: 453

Please note G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: Ropen doors and endanger other persons or road users Rclimb out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves. Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Rreleasing the parking brake Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of chil- dren. G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the key, the key could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the key. Remove any bulky keyrings before inserting the key into the ignition lock. u To insert the key into the ignition lock 1 To switch on the power supply 2 To switch on the ignition 3 To start the engine Automatic transmission X Turn the key to position 3. The READY indicator appears in the instru- ment cluster. A tone sounds. X Shift out of transmission position j or i. Pulling away Please note G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can impede pedal travel or block a pedal which is depressed. This jeopardises safe operation of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects in the vehicle safely, so that they cannot reach the driver's foot- well. Make sure the floormats and carpets are properly secured so that they cannot slip and obstruct the pedals. Do not lay several floormats or carpets on top of one another. G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles Rshoes with high heels Rslippers 66 Pulling away

Driving.

There is a risk of an accident.

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 76 · Applies to: 453

Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only avail- able with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steer- ing and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driv- ing. Note the following when pulling away: RDo not drive with the parking brake applied. RUse caution when pulling away on slippery surfaces. RDo not allow tyres to spin. RDepress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. RPress the release button on the selector lever. RShift the gear selector lever to position h or k. Using the parking brake Please note G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire Rlose its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. G WARNING If you must brake the vehicle with the parking brake, the braking distance is considerably longer and the wheels could lock. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Only use the parking brake to brake the vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the wheels lock, release the parking brake until the wheels begin turning again. G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Applying the parking brake X Pull parking brake ; upwards. The brake lights do not light up when you brake the vehicle with the parking brake. Releasing the parking brake X depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Press release button : on parking brake ; and move the parking brake down to the stop. Pulling away 67

Driving. Z

Hill start assist

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 77 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING After a while, hill start assist no longer holds the vehicle and it may roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Hill start assist keeps the vehicle in place when driving uphill as soon as the brake pedal is released. Hill start assist is only active in the follow- ing situations: Rwhen pulling away on an uphill slope Rwhen the parking brake is released Rthe transmission is not in position i RESP® is functioning correctly. X Release the brake pedal. The vehicle is then held for about one sec- ond. X Pull away. Automatic transmission Please note G WARNING When the engine is switched off, the auto- matic transmission shifts into neutral position N. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. Always shift to parking position P before switching off the engine. Secure the parked vehicle against rolling away by applying the parking brake. Transmission position display ! Only shift into transmission positions B, C or A when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you may damage the transmission. The following transmission positions are available: Rj Park position Position j should not be used to brake the vehicle when parking. To secure the vehi- cle, apply the parking brake in addition to shifting to transmission position j. Rk Reverse gear Ri Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Rh Drive Changing the transmission position j Park position with parking lock k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive The ignition must be switched on in order to shift the transmission to positions j, i or k. To shift the transmission from position j, you must also depress the brake pedal. X Press release knob :. X Shift the selector lever to the desired transmission position. Maximum acceleration (kickdown) To reach maximum acceleration, use kick- down: X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. 68 Automatic transmission

Driving.

Using the turn signals

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 78 · Applies to: 453

The ignition must be switched on in order to use the turn signals. X To indicate: press the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 (right) or 2 (left) past the point of resistance. X To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the point of resistance. The turn signal flashes three times. Acoustic presence indicator Useful information Vehicles with an electric motor generate much less driving noise than vehicles with internal combustion engines. As a result, the vehicle may not be heard by other road users in certain situations. In order to allow your vehicle to be heard when it is moving at slow speeds, a sound generator installed in the vehicle produces a specific noise at speeds between 0 and 30 km/h. This function is called the acoustic presence indicator. This helps other road users, particularly pedestrians and cyclists, to hear your vehicle better. The acoustic presence indicator can also be heard in the vehicle interior. The volume of the acoustic presence indica- tor depends on the engine speed. The faster you accelerate, the louder the sound is. At speeds of over 30 km/h, the sound is switched off. Above this speed, the driving noise nat- urally created by the vehicle is typically sufficient for the vehicle to be heard in good time by other road users. Deactivating/activating the acoustic presence indicator The acoustic presence indicator is automat- ically activated each time the ignition is started. X Press the switch. If the acoustic presence indicator is deac- tivated, the LED on the switch lights up. Radar-based recuperation Only for instrument cluster with colour dis- play: The "Radar-based recuperation" function adapts the vehicle's rate of recuperation to current traffic conditions. It activates itself automatically as soon as the accelerator pedal is released. There are five levels up to the maximum value for optimum recupera- tion and distance to the vehicle ahead. The maximum value can vary depending on the charge status of the battery and the battery temperature. Radar sensors measure the distance to and the speed of a vehicle ahead. The shorter the distance to the vehicle ahead, the greater the recuperation. When recuperation is high, the brake lamps also light up. The current level of recuperation is not shown in the power display (Y page 71). Radar-based recuperation is not active in the following cases: Rthe radar sensor system is malfunctioning Rthe connection to the radar is interrupted RActive Brake Assist is deactivated RECO mode is switched on Radar-based recuperation 69

Driving. Z

Rthe vehicle speed is too low

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 79 · Applies to: 453

Rthe transmission is in position k or i Radar-based recuperation is switched off when ECO mode is activated. On-board computer with colour display: the symbol in the display indicates the status of radar-based recuperation: R lights up white: switched on, not active R lights up green: switched on, active R is not displayed: Active Brake Assist is deactivated or the radar sensor is mal- functioning On-board computer with colour display: radar-based recuperation is switched on and off in the on-board computer (Y page 110). Observe the notes on safe driving (Y page 56). Driving economically Notes on economical driving In order to save energy, a part of the kinetic energy is recuperated and stored in the high-voltage battery. When the driver relea- ses the accelerator pedal, the vehicle decel- erates. In the following cases, the vehicle does not decelerate, or only decelerates to a limited extent, when the accelerator pedal is released: Rthe gear lever is in position h and the vehicle is rolling backwards Rthe gear lever is in position k and the vehicle is rolling forwards On steep slopes, the vehicle may not be held at all or only be held to a limited degree. In the following cases recuperation is restricted: Rthe high-voltage battery is full or too cold Rthe power electronics or engine has over- heated Recommendations for driving economically: Raccelerate moderately Robserve the power availability display (Y page 71) Rdrive with care Ruse the air conditioning and the electrical consumers sparingly Rhave maintenance work carried out at the specified service intervals You can use ECO mode in order to save more energy. ECO mode has the following characteristics: Rreduced torque and significantly reduced power. This supports a particularly effi- cient, steady driving style. The speed is reduced to approx. 110 km/h. Rthe performance of the air-conditioning and heating systems is reduced. Rthe maximum available recuperation is activated. Rthe vehicle accelerates more slowly. Rthe "radar-based recuperation" function is switched off. To increase acceleration when in ECO mode, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. Switching ECO mode on and off X Press button :. If the energy-saving function is activated, the ECO display is shown in the on-board computer. The energy-saving function is switched off when the ignition is restarted. 70 Driving economically

Driving.

Power and charge level display

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 80 · Applies to: 453

Useful information

Power display ; Charge level display Power display : and charge level display ; can be adjusted to the left or right. The charge level display lights up when the vehicle is unlocked. Power display ! Do not hang any objects on the power display. This could cause the dashboard clock to be torn out of its anchorage point and be severely damaged. Power display : contains two areas: RArea to the right of 0 The current power that the high-voltage battery provides is shown here. 100% cor- responds to the peak performance of the high-voltage battery. RArea to the left of 0 The vehicle's level of recuperation in over- run mode and when braking is shown here. The LED ring in power display : shows the power output available. If the needle for power display : is in the "OFF" position, the vehicle is not ready to drive because: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe gear lever has not been moved to posi- tion i or j to start the drive system Rthe charging cable is still connected to the vehicle socket Rthere is insufficient power available from the high-voltage battery Rthere is a malfunction in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system If the drive system has been started, the nee- dle of power display : is in position "0". The READY indicator appears in the instrument cluster. A tone sounds. The vehicle is ready for driving. Charge level display ! Do not hang any objects on the charge level gauge. This could cause the charge level gauge to be torn out of its anchorage point and be damaged. Charge level display ; displays the charge status of the high-voltage battery as a per- centage. The high-voltage battery has reached the reserve level in the following cases: Rthe Battery Reserve Level message appears in the display Rcharge level display ; is in the red area i Charge the high-voltage battery when the charge falls below 20%. Understanding the eco score display in the on-board computer Useful information The eco score display provides information on how to drive economically. A higher percentage indicates a more eco- nomical driving style. The percentage of the eco score display is only calculated after a short distance. If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the eco score display will be reset. Driving economically 71

Driving. Z

Monochrome display

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 81 · Applies to: 453

The percentage of the eco score display

increases when you:

Raccelerate with moderation

Ravoid unnecessary acceleration and

deceleration

Colour display

The percentage in the eco score display is

calculated using the following categories:

RSpeed: the value increases when driving at

low speeds.

RAnticipation: the value increases when

unnecessary acceleration and decelera-

tion is avoided.

Using the eco score display in the smart

Media-System

Calling up the eco score menu

X Select Vehicle > eco score.

Evaluating the current trip

X Select Current trip .

Evaluation information and values are cal-

culated.

The following rating information and val-

ues appear:

RBar graphs for accelerate, anticipa‐

tory and shift

RBar graphs for Speed and Anticipation

RDistance covered

RTotal eco score as a percentage

Saving the current trip

X Select Current trip > Save.

X Select the category under which you want

to save the trip.

The values for the current trip will be

added to the category selected and the

current trip will be reset. In the instrument

cluster, the trip computer values will be

returned to "From reset".

The values for the current trip will be

added to the category selected and the

current trip will be reset. In the instrument

cluster, the values for the "From start" trip

computer and eco score display will be

reset.

Comparing the current trip with the

saved trips from a category

Last trip saved in this category ; Average value for the category = Best trip in the category X Select Current trip > W > Compare. X Select a category. A comparison of the values for the current trip with the values of the selected cate- gory appears. X Select the comparison value :, ; or =. The current trip is compared to the respec- tive comparison value from the category. 72 Driving economically

Driving.

Resetting the current trip data

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 82 · Applies to: 453

X Select Current trip > Reset. X Select Yes. In the instrument cluster, the trip com- puter values will be returned to "From reset". In the instrument cluster, the values for the "From start" trip computer and eco score display will be reset. Activating/deactivating eco score after a trip X To activate: select Current trip > W > Show eco score after trip. X To deactivate: select Current trip > W > Hide eco score after trip. Displaying eco score for saved trips in a category X Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐ red trips. X Select a category. eco score displays the comparison values. eco score contains the following compari- son values for each category: RSummary RLast value RAverage value RBest value For the category Last trip saved you can choose from various types of evaluations. Types of evaluations: RSummary RDetailed report Renaming a category At least one trip must be stored in the respec- tive category. X Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐ red trips > W > Rename this category. Resetting the eco score of a category At least one trip must be stored in the respec- tive category. X Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐ red trips > W > Reset this category. Braking correctly Please note G WARNING The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This increases the braking dis- tance and could even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do not simultaneously depress both the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving. The vehicle decelerates as soon as you release the accelerator pedal. This aids recu- peration as the motor is used as a generator and charges the high-voltage battery. Braking on steep downhill gradients Observe the following rules when driving on downhill gradients: Rdo not move the selector lever to position i Rif recuperation is restricted, also brake at intervals Braking on wet road surfaces There may be a delayed brake response when driving on wet roads, after driving through a car wash or after driving through deep water. X Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front. X Brake more firmly. Braking on salt-treated roads When driving on salt-treated roads, a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and pads. Braking correctly 73

Driving. Z

This increases the vehicle's braking dis-

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 83 · Applies to: 453

tance. X In order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the brakes occasionally while pay- ing attention to the traffic conditions. X Brake carefully at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey. X Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front. Driving on wet roads Aquaplaning Depending on driving style and tyre tread depths, aquaplaning can occur on the road. Adapt your driving style as follows: X Reduce the speed. X Brake carefully. X Avoid sudden steering movements. X Avoid tyre ruts. Fording ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum per- missible water depth to be exceeded. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. You could otherwise dam- age the engine, the electronics or the transmission. Observe the following when driving through standing water: X Do not drive through water that is higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body. X Drive at walking pace. Winter driving X Before the start of winter, have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist work- shop. X Use winter tyres and, if applicable, snow chains. X Drive carefully and avoid sudden acceler- ation, turning and braking on slippery road surfaces. X Do not use cruise control. X If the vehicle skids, take corrective steer- ing actions to counteract the movement. X If the vehicle skids, shift the transmission to position i. X Do not use the outside temperature display as a way to determine if conditions are icy. X Observe the road surface. Lane Keeping Assist Please note G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can: Rissue an unnecessary warning Rnot issue a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. G WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, apply the brakes or acceler- ate the vehicle yourself, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Lane Keeping Assist issues an acoustic and visual warning when a vehicle unintention- ally leaves the lane. Lane Keeping Assist uses a camera which is located on the windscreen behind the rear- view mirror. Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehi- cle in its lane. The driver is responsible for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and staying within the lane. 74 Lane Keeping Assist

Driving.

Lane Keeping Assist could be impaired or fail

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 84 · Applies to: 453

to respond under the following conditions: Rpoor visibility Rstrong glaring light Rdirty windscreen in the camera area Runclear or broken lane markings Rvery narrow and winding roads Rhighly variable shade conditions on the road When the turn signal is set, warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. No warning is given in the following situa- tions: Rwhen crossing a lane marking quickly Rat speeds below 70 km/h On-board computer with monochrome dis- play: the ¸ and ¤ symbols in the dis- play indicate the status of Lane Keeping Assist: R¸: speed is below 70 km/h or lanes are not detected due to external causes. No warning is given when the vehicle leaves the lane. R¤: speed is above 70 km/h and the sys- tem is able to detect lane markings. A warning is given if the vehicle uninten- tionally leaves the detected lane. On-board computer with colour display: The ¸ symbol in the display indicates the status of Lane Keeping Assist: R¸ lights up white: speed is below 70 km/h or lanes are not detected due to external causes. No warning is given when the vehicle leaves the lane. R¸ lights up green: speed is above 70 km/h and the system is able to detect lane markings. A warning is given if the vehicle unintentionally leaves the detec- ted lane. Activating and deactivating Lane Keeping Assist X Press the switch. When Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated, the LED on the switch lights up. On-board computer with colour display: the display also shows a message. When the ignition is restarted, the last set- ting of Lane Keeping Assist is retained. Cruise control and limiter Please note G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and this differs from your current speed, the vehi- cle will accelerate. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle can accelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Before you call up the stored speed, pay attention to traffic conditions. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Cruise control is used in order to drive at a constant speed for a prolonged period. The limiter helps to avoid exceeding a stored speed. The driver is responsible for driving the vehicle in a safe manner, controlling the vehicle speed and braking in good time. If there is a change of drivers, inform the new driver of the speed stored. Cruise control and limiter 75

Driving. Z

The two driver assist systems require the

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 85 · Applies to: 453

following: Rfavourable weather and good visibility Rgood road and traffic conditions The cruise control and limiter systems do not brake automatically. Rreduce the vehicle speed by applying the brakes Speed regulation is cancelled when the fol- lowing occur: Rbraking (including the parking brake) RESP® intervention On downhill gradients or when accelerating briefly, cruise control may interrupt speed regulation. Afterwards, the set speed is applied again. On downhill slopes, the limiter can exceed the set speed. In this case, the stored speed flashes in the display and a warning tone sounds. Cruise control is ready for use at speeds above 30 km/h. With the limiter, speeds of 30 km/h and over can be set as the maximum speed. Cruise control and limiter cannot be activa- ted at the same time. Activating cruise control or the limiter X Press top (cruise control) or bottom (lim- iter) of button :. The ¯ (cruise control) or È (limiter) button appears in the instrument cluster display. Storing the current speed X Press ® button ;. Limiter: the stored speed appears next to the È symbol in the instrument cluster display. Cruise control: the stored speed appears next to the ¯ symbol in the instrument cluster display. Adjusting the stored speed X Press ® button ; or g until the desired speed is reached. Interrupting cruise control and the limiter X Press ± button ?. The stored speed can be accessed again later. The stored speed is deleted when the engine is switched off. Calling up the stored speed X Press ° button =. X Cruise control: release the accelerator pedal. Deactivating cruise control or the lim- iter X Press button : to the OFF centre position. The ¯ or È symbol in the instrument cluster display goes out. The stored speed is deleted. The stored speed is deleted when the engine is switched off. Charging the high-voltage battery Please note G DANGER The vehicle's high voltage electrical sys- tem is under high voltage. If you modify 76 Charging the high-voltage battery

Driving.

components in the vehicle's high-voltage

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 86 · Applies to: 453

electrical system or touch damaged com- ponents, you may be electrocuted. The components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may be damaged in an accident, although the damage is not visi- ble. There is a risk of fatal injury. Do not touch any high-voltage components after an accident and never modify the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have the vehicle towed away after an acci- dent and the vehicle's high-voltage elec- trical system checked by a qualified spe- cialist workshop. G WARNING In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pressure of the high-voltage battery could exceed a critical value. In this case, flam- mable gas escapes through a vent valve in the vehicle's underbody. The gas could ignite. There is a risk of injury. In cases of unusual smells developing, smoke or burn marks, stop the charging process immediately. Leave the danger area immediately. Secure the danger area at a suitable distance. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If the housing of the high-voltage battery has been damaged, electrolyte and gases may leak out. These are poisonous and caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or cloth- ing. Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes off with water and seek medical attention straight away. G DANGER The vehicle's high-voltage electrical sys- tem is under high voltage. If you carry out work on high-voltage components, you may suffer an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. To avoid such risks, observe the following: Rdo not tamper with high-voltage com- ponents or the orange cables of the vehi- cle's high-voltage electrical system Rnever touch the high-voltage compo- nents or the orange cables of the high- voltage electrical system in a vehicle which has been involved in an accident Rnever touch any damaged components or the damaged orange cables of the vehi- cle's high-voltage electrical system Rdo not remove the covers of the high- voltage electrical system components that are marked with a yellow warning sticker Rdo not insert any objects which conduct electricity into the charging cable con- nector or the charging cable socket G DANGER The vehicle's high-voltage electrical sys- tem is under high voltage. If the charging process is not performed properly, it could cause a fire or an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. Do not perform the charging process in the following situations: Rat temperatures of over 50 † and below -40 † Rin storms Rif the charging cable is damaged, rusted or corroded Rif there is moisture on the charging cable connector or charging cable socket, or your hands are wet Rwhen cleaning the vehicle To avoid hazardous situations, always han- dle the charging cable correctly before and after using it: Rbefore using the charging cable for the first time, remove the adhesive tape which holds the cable together Runwind the charging cable fully before every charging process Charging the high-voltage battery 77

Driving. Z

Rthere must be no foreign objects in the

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 87 · Applies to: 453

charging cable connector or on the charg-

ing cable socket

Rkeep the charging cable out of the reach of

children and animals. Always store the

charging cable in a safe place, e.g. in the

charging cable bag

The high-voltage battery must not be

charged with a damaged charging cable.

Therefore, always make sure that:

Ryou do not damage the charging cable, e.g.

by driving over it, pulling too hard or as a

result of heavy impacts

Rthe charging cable is not twisted, as oth-

erwise the charging cable may overheat

and the cable covering may be damaged

Rthe charging cable is not placed in water,

fluids or snow

The charging cable must always be used in

the correct manner. In order to ensure the

charging cable is handled correctly, observe

the following:

Rdo not make any changes or modifications

to the charging cable

Ronly use the charging cable to charge the

high-voltage battery

Rdo not pull out the charging cable connec-

tor or the charging cable socket during the

charging process

For safety reasons, only use the charging

cable which is supplied with the vehicle or

has been approved by smart for this vehicle.

Useful information

Method of operation

The vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage

battery for driving. The high-voltage bat-

tery stores the energy needed to operate the

electric motor and releases it again.

The electric motor uses energy stored in the

high-voltage battery for pulling away and

accelerating.

In overrun mode, kinetic energy is converted

into electrical energy by recuperation and

stored in the high-voltage battery.

In addition to recuperation, the high-voltage

battery can be charged as follows:

Rwith the suitable charging cable at a mains

socket while the vehicle is stationary

Rwith the suitable charging cable at a wall-

box while the vehicle is stationary

Rwith the suitable charging cable at a

charging station while the vehicle is sta-

tionary

Charging cable for charging at a charging station or wallbox ; Charging cable for charging at a mains socket Charging cables may differ from the versions shown depending on the country. The different versions of charging cables are distinguished by their charging cable con- nectors. Charging cables which are charged at a mains socket also have controls. The options listed for charging a high-volt- age battery are not available in all countries. The high-voltage battery can be charged at a charging station or wallbox in a nominal voltage range from 100 V to 400 V. Vehicles with 22 kW on-board charger: the high-voltage battery can be charged in a nominal voltage range from 220 V to 400 V. i If possible only charge the high-voltage battery when the charge is below 80%. Charge the high-voltage battery at the latest when the charge falls below 20%. Discharged high-voltage battery The high-voltage electrical system switches off if the high-voltage battery is completely discharged. This protects the high-voltage battery from exhaustive discharge. 78 Charging the high-voltage battery

Driving.

i Switching the ignition on and then off

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 88 · Applies to: 453

can reactivate the high-voltage electrical system temporarily. The vehicle can then be parked safely. Do not leave the vehicle with a discharged or almost fully discharged high-voltage bat- tery for longer than 14 days. You can check the charge status in the charge level display (Y page 71). Extreme outside temperatures The efficiency of the high-voltage battery is temperature-dependent and is significantly reduced at low or high temperatures. In addi- tion, the electrolytes used may freeze at very low temperatures. The LED ring in the power output display shows the power output available (Y page 71). Energy consumption and range The available energy in the high-voltage battery is basically reduced by the following factors: Rlow outside temperatures Roperating the air-conditioning system or heating Ruse of electrical consumers Leaving the vehicle parked for an extended period at low outdoor temperatures without charging it can lead to the following: Rhigh-voltage battery output is signifi- cantly reduced Rcharge times can be longer Rrange can be significantly reduced In extreme cases, it may not be possible to start the vehicle as a result. You should therefore always ensure that the high-volt- age battery is fully charged or that the charging cable is connected when parking the vehicle for an extended period of time at low outside temperatures. As the high-voltage battery ages, the capa- city of the high-voltage battery will dimin- ish over the battery's lifetime. This means that the maximum range and the maximum acceleration are reduced. Battery care Observe the following notes on battery care: Ravoid storing or transporting the vehicle in high temperatures over a long period (e.g. container transport). Rconnect the vehicle to a power supply when parking it for an extended period of time. RTemperatures below Ò25 † for more than seven days can cause irreversible damage to the vehicle due to frost damage. Terms of use Observe the information on exceptions and limitations in the warranty documentation and in the Service Booklet. Voltage surge protector ! Overvoltage in the mains supply can damage the vehicle. The vehicle is there- fore equipped with a device which protects it from overvoltage in the mains supply. This device may be triggered during severe thunderstorms, for example, and may lead to the building's circuit breaker being tripped and an interruption in the power supply. These functions protect the vehicle. After the building's circuit breaker is switched on again, the charging process resumes automatically. Following an interruption in the power supply with- out the building's circuit breaker being tripped, it may take up to ten minutes for charging to resume automatically. After the device has triggered, switch the building's fuse unit on again. Otherwise, the charging process will not resume. Heat generated by the charging cable and charging cable connector Charging cables and charging cable connec- tors may heat up during the charging proc- ess at a power socket. Charging the high-voltage battery 79

Driving. Z

In the following cases, the degree of heating

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 89 · Applies to: 453

is within the permissible limits:

Rthe mains supply and charging cable

infrastructure are intact

Rthe instructions for handling the charging

cable and control panel of the charging

cable are observed

If heating up beyond the permissible limits

occurs, have the mains supply infrastructure

checked.

Disposing of a charging cable

Do not dispose of a charging cable with

household rubbish, give it to a suitable recy-

cling service. Abide by the potential legal

requirements for recycling.

Understanding the vehicle socket

Vehicle socket overview

G DANGER

Connecting the charging cable to the

mains supply via incorrectly installed

mains sockets or by means of adapters,

extension cables or similar could cause a

fire or an electric shock. There is a risk of

fatal injury.

To avoid hazardous situations, observe the

following:

ROnly connect the charging cable to

mains sockets:

- which have been properly installed

and

- which have been inspected by a quali-

fied electrician

RFor safety reasons, only use the charg-

ing cables supplied with the vehicle, or

charging cables which have been

approved for use with this vehicle.

RNever use a damaged charging cable.

RDo not use:

- extension cables

- extension reels

- multiple sockets

RNever use socket adapters to connect the

charging cable to the mains socket. The

only exception being if the adapter has

been tested and approved by the manu-

facturer for charging the high-voltage

battery of an electric vehicle.

RObserve the safety notes in the operat-

ing instructions for the socket adapter.

Charge socket flap ; Socket cap = Locking mechanism ? Indicator lamp A Vehicle socket Indicator lamp on the vehicle socket When the indicator lamp on the vehicle socket lights up, this means the following: Indicator lamp Flashes green slowly High-voltage battery is charging. Lights up green High-voltage battery is fully charged. Flashes orange slowly Vehicle waiting for charg- ing to start. 80 Charging the high-voltage battery

Driving.

Indicator lamp

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 90 · Applies to: 453

Flashes

orange

Vehicle is paused from

charging.

Flashes red

quickly

A malfunction occurred

during charging.

Charging the battery at a charging sta-

tion or wall box

Charging stations without communica-

tions functionality

Charging stations without communications

functionality must be activated before

charging, e.g. by using an RFID card. Observe

the notes provided by the charging station

operator.

Charging stations with communication

capabilities (Plug&Charge)

The "Plug&Charge" function is not available

in all countries.

A suitable electricity contract is required in

order to use "Plug&Charge". To arrange this,

contact the charging station operator.

If the vehicle is connected to a charging sta-

tion with communication capabilities, infor-

mation and technical parameters are

exchanged so that the charging process can

be started without additional activation.

This function is called "Plug&Charge".

Due to the data transfer, it may take up to

30 seconds after the charging cable is con-

nected before charging begins.

i International Standard ISO 15118 is used

for the communication between the vehicle

and the intelligent charging station.

Connecting a charging cable

G DANGER

Connecting the charging cable to the wall-

box via an incorrectly installed wallbox or

by means of adapters, extension cables or

similar could cause a fire or an electric

shock. There is a risk of fatal injury.

To avoid such risks, observe the following:

ROnly connect the charging cable to a

wallbox:

- which has been properly installed and

- has been inspected by a qualified

electrician

RFor safety reasons, only use charging

cables which have been tested and

approved for charging the high-voltage

battery of an electric vehicle.

RNever use damaged charging cables.

RDo not connect the charging cable to an

amplifier.

RDo not extend the charging cable.

RNever use an adapter.

RObserve the safety notes in the operat-

ing instructions for the wallbox.

Charge socket flap ; Socket cap = Locking mechanism ? Indicator lamp A Vehicle socket X Wallbox without a pre-installed cable or charging station: before using the charg- ing cable for the first time, remove the adhesive tape, which holds the cable together. X Fully unwind the charging cable before charging. Charging the high-voltage battery 81

Driving. Z

X Engage transmission position j.

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 91 · Applies to: 453

X Turn the key to position u in the ignition lock and remove it. X Open socket flap : (Y page 80). X Release locking mechanism = on socket cap ;. Socket cap ; opens. X Wallbox without a preinstalled cable: insert the charging cable connector into the wallbox socket to the stop. X Insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket A to the stop. The vehicle socket locks audibly. The high-voltage battery is charged and indicator lamp ? on the vehicle socket slowly flashes green. i The high-voltage battery is fully charged when indicator lamp ? on the vehicle socket lights up green. i The vehicle must not be moved during charging. The gear lever cannot be shifted from position j. i Depending on the temperature, the engine cooling system and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process. Removing the charging cable The charging cable may be removed when the charging process has completed or has been cancelled. ! Always disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle socket first. Disconnect- ing the charging cable from the stationary socket first could damage the charging cable connector. X Press the % button on the key. Indicator lamp ? above vehicle socket A goes out. Vehicle socket A unlocks audibly. X Disconnect the charging cable within 60 seconds from vehicle socket A. Other- wise, the vehicle will relock the vehicle socket. The connector locking mechanism on the charging station is opened. X Close socket cap ;. X Close charge socket flap :. X Wallbox without a pre-mounted cable or charging station: if necessary, disconnect the charging cable from the wallbox and stow it in the charging cable bag (Y page 85). Understanding the charging cable for mains sockets Useful information ! Only use the charging cable to charge the high-voltage battery. Do not use the charging cable for other purposes. It may otherwise be damaged. Depending on the vehicle version, the vehicle is equipped with different charging cable versions. Charging cable versions differ in their controls. i If you use the mains socket to charge the high-voltage battery, the charging time is longer and the electricity consumption is higher. If possible, charge the high-volt- age battery at a wallbox or a charging sta- tion. Only use a charging cable which is approved by smart for this vehicle. Do not leave the charging cable control panel hanging loose from a mains socket. Other- wise, this could lead to a bad contact with the mains socket and to malfunctions when charging the vehicle. Never lift or carry the control panel by the charging cable connector or the mains plug. Only for charging cable version 1: before charging at a mains socket, check the maxi- mum permissible charge current for the cor- responding mains socket or building. The maximum value of the charge current is set to the country-specific setting for the supplied charging cable. When charging abroad, the maximum value may exceed that of the coun- try you are in. Observe the regulations spe- cific to the country you are in if charging abroad. Consult a qualified specialist work- shop if you have questions about charge cur- rent settings or a malfunction. 82 Charging the high-voltage battery

Driving.

Controls of charging cable version one

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 92 · Applies to: 453

Voltage indicator lamp

; Charging process indicator lamp

= Indicator lamp temperature monitor

? Electrical fuse and control system indi-

cator lamp

The indicator lamps on the charging cable

indicate the following:

Indicator lamp :

Lights up

white

Voltage is switched on. The

high-voltage battery can

be charged.

Indicator lamp ;

Flashes

green

High-voltage battery is

charging.

Indicator lamp =

Lights up

red

With flashing green indica-

tor lamp ;: the charge out-

put is reduced due to over-

temperature.

Without flashing green

indicator lamp ;: charg-

ing was terminated due to

overtemperature on the

charging cable.

Flashes red

Charging was terminated

due to overtemperature on

the mains socket.

Indicator lamp ?

Flashes red

quickly

An internal malfunction

has occurred. The high-

voltage battery cannot be

charged.

The infrastructure has a

malfunction. The high-

voltage battery cannot be

charged.

If the control element detects a fault current

or a malfunction, the charging process is

interrupted. The charging process will be

resumed automatically when the malfunc-

tion has been rectified.

Controls of charging cable version two

Indicator lamp for charge current setting ; Voltage indicator lamp = Charging process indicator lamp ? Electrical fuse and control system indi- cator lamp A Button for setting the charge current The indicator lamps on the charging cable indicate the following: Indicator lamp : Lights up green Value is set as the desired charging current. Flashes orange Depending on the mains socket, the value cannot be set as the desired charging current. Charging the high-voltage battery 83

Driving. Z

Indicator lamp ;

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 93 · Applies to: 453

Lights up green Voltage is switched on. The high-voltage battery can be charged. Indicator lamp = Lights up green High-voltage battery is charging. Flashes orange Connection to vehicle has been made. Indicator lamp ? Lights up red The current at the control panel is not correct. The high-voltage battery can- not be charged. For transportation, wrap the charging cable around the control panel or secure it to the control panel housing. Setting the charging current (only charging cable version two) G WARNING If the charge current draw via a mains socket is too high during the charging process, the external mains supply may overheat. There is a risk of fire. Before charging, check the maximum per- missible charge current available at the location. If necessary, contact a qualified specialist company for assistance. Adjust your vehicle's settings, if neces- sary. ! If the charge current is too high, the fuse could be tripped or the external mains supply could overheat. Check if the exter- nal mains supply is equipped to handle the programmed charge current. If necessary, reduce the programmed charge current or use a different mains socket. You can only limit the charging current for charging the high-voltage battery with charging cable version 2. This may protect the mains supply from overloads. The maximum setting value and the adjust- ment values may vary from country to coun- try. The preset default value is the minimum set- ting. This is the minimum charge current available from the mains supply. If the charging cable is left connected to the mains socket, the currently selected values will be used for the next charging process. If the charging cable is removed from the mains socket, the values will be reset to the minimum setting for the next charging proc- ess. X Check the maximum permissible charge current for the relevant mains socket. X Insert the mains plug into the mains socket. You have one minute to set the charge cur- rent. X Press button A repeatedly until the indi- cator lamp in the desired setting lights up green. The desired value has been set. i After one minute, the charge current can only be set by restarting. To do so, remove the charging cable from the mains supply and reinsert it into the mains socket. 84 Charging the high-voltage battery

Driving.

Charging the battery using a mains

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 94 · Applies to: 453

socket

Connecting a charging cable

Charge socket flap ; Socket cap = Locking mechanism ? Indicator lamp A Vehicle socket X Fully unwind the charging cable before charging. X Engage transmission position j. X Turn the key to position u in the ignition lock and remove it. X Open socket flap : (Y page 80). X Release locking mechanism = on socket cap ;. Socket cap ; opens. X Insert the mains plug into the mains socket to the stop. X Only for charging cable version 2: set the desired charge current. X Insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket A to the stop. The vehicle socket locks audibly. The high-voltage battery is charged and indicator lamp ? on the vehicle socket slowly flashes green. i The high-voltage battery is fully charged when indicator lamp ? on the vehicle socket lights up green perma- nently. i The vehicle must not be moved during charging. The gear lever cannot be shifted from position j. i Depending on the temperature, the engine cooling system and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process. i Only for charging cable version 2: if charging the vehicle's high-voltage bat- tery is taking longer than usual, check the maximum charge current settings. Removing the charging cable ! Always disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle socket first. Disconnect- ing the charging cable from the stationary socket first could damage the charging cable connector. The charging cable can be removed when the high-voltage battery is completely charged or charging has to be interrupted. X Press the % button on the key. Indicator lamp ? above vehicle socket A goes out. Vehicle socket A unlocks audi- bly. X Disconnect the charging cable within 60 seconds from vehicle socket A. Other- wise, the vehicle will relock the vehicle socket. X Close socket cap ;. X Close charge socket flap :. X Remove the charging cable from the mains socket. X Stow the charging cable safely in the charging cable bag (Y page 85). Storing the charging cable ! The charging cable must be stowed in the charging cable bag only to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle. X Stow the charging cable in the charging cable bag. The charging cable bag is located in the boot (Y page 153). Charging the high-voltage battery 85

Driving. Z

Switching on the lighting

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 95 · Applies to: 453

Useful information

The driver must ensure that the light set-

tings match the current weather, light and

traffic conditions.

For reasons of safety, smart recommends that

you drive with the daytime driving lights or

dipped-beam headlamps switched on even

during the daytime.

A warning tone sounds if the lights are still

on when you leave the vehicle.

In some countries, operation of the head-

lamps varies due to legal requirements and

self-imposed obligations.

Combination switch control ; Marking Activating automatic headlamp mode G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. While the engine is running, the light setting is selected automatically according to the brightness of the ambient light. à con- trols the daytime driving lights, side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. X Turn combination switch control : to the à position. When one or more of the following occurs, the lights are switched off automatically: RThe engine is switched off. RThe driver's door is opened. RThe vehicle is locked. RThe main-beam headlamps are not switched on when the vehicle is station- ary. Switching on the dipped-beam head- lamps X Turn combination switch control : to the L position. The L indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Switching the main-beam headlamps on or off The engine must be running. X Turn the combination switch control to the à or K position. X To switch on: press the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its original position. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the main-beam head- lamps are switched on. 86 Switching on the lighting

Ensuring good visibility.

Using the headlamp flasher

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 96 · Applies to: 453

X Pull the combination switch in the direc-

tion of arrow 2.

Switching on the side lamps

X Turn combination switch control : to the

T position.

Switching the foglamps and rear fog-

lamp on and off

Only vehicles with front foglamps have the

"Foglamps" function.

Combination switch middle ring ; Marking Switch on the ignition and either the side lamps or the dipped beam headlamps in order to switch on the fog lamps. Start the engine and switch on either the side lamps or dipped beam headlamps in order to switch on the rear foglamp. X To switch on or off manually: turn combi- nation switch middle ring : to the desired marking: RO Foglamps RR Rear foglamp After releasing, the combination switch mid- dle ring returns automatically to the neutral position. The foglamps and rear foglamp also switch off automatically in the following situations: Rthe lights are switched off. Rthe engine is switched off and the control is in the à position. Using the cornering light function Only vehicles with the LED & Sensor package are equipped with the cornering light func- tion. The cornering light function uses the front foglamps to improve the illumination of the road in the direction in which you are turn- ing, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. The following conditions must be fulfilled for the cornering light function to switch on automatically: Rthe dipped-beam headlamps are switched on Rthe vehicle is moving at less than 40 km/h Rthe turn signal is switched on or the steer- ing wheel is turned Adjusting the lighting Adjusting the headlamp range The vehicle load can affect the headlamp range. This can impair visibility, and the headlamps can dazzle oncoming traffic. The ignition must be switched on in order to set the headlamp range. X Turn headlamp range adjuster : to the position which corresponds to the load in your vehicle. Positions for the vehicle load: Rg: Driver's seat occupied or driver's seat and front-passenger seat occupied R1: All seats occupied Adjusting the lighting 87

Ensuring good visibility. Z

R2: All seats occupied and luggage com-

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 97 · Applies to: 453

partment laden R3: Driver's seat occupied and luggage compartment laden Adjusting the dipped-beam headlamps to left-hand or right-hand traffic The symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps are required when travelling in countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to that in which the vehicle is registered. Unlike the asymmetrical dipped- beam headlamps, these headlamps do not dazzle oncoming traffic. Symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps provide less illu- mination to the edge of the carriageway. X Open the service cover. X For symmetrical dipped beam: turn the screws of both headlamps as far as they will go to position ±. For asymmetrical dipped beam: turn the screws of both headlamps as far as they will go to position q. X Have the dipped-beam headlamp setting checked at a qualified specialist work- shop. Using the interior lighting Switching the interior lighting on and off The interior lights go on when you unlock the doors. The interior lights switch off in the following situations: RA door is opened and 15 minutes have passed. RAll doors are closed, the vehicle has been locked and 15 seconds have passed. RAll doors are closed, the vehicle has not been locked and 4 minutes have passed. RThe engine has been started. The interior lighting can be activated when a door is open. After closing the doors, the interior lighting goes out. X Press switch : to switch the left-hand reading lamp on and off. X Move switch ; to the desired position: RInterior lighting switched on. RInterior lighting controlled automati- cally. RInterior lighting switched off. X Press switch = to switch the right-hand reading lamp on and off. Adjusting the ambient lighting (colour display) On-board computer with colour display: the ambient lighting is set in the on-board com- puter (Y page 110). Using the windscreen wipers Switching on the windscreen wipers Please note ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers when the windscreen is dry, as this could 88 Using the windscreen wipers

Ensuring good visibility.

damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 98 · Applies to: 453

that has collected on the windscreen can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windscreen is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the wind- screen wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate them using washer fluid. ! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind- screen becomes dirty in dry weather con- ditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could dam- age the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are free of ice. Otherwise the wiper motor may overheat. Wiper blades are subject to wear and tear. smart recommends replacing the wiper blades twice a year. Worn or damaged wiper blades cause smearing on the windscreen. On vehicles with a rain sensor, malfunctions are then possible. Switching continuous wipe on and off : Control for wipe frequency g Continuous wipe, off © Automatic wipe 1 Continuous wipe, slow 2 Continuous wipe, fast î Wiping with washer fluid The ignition must be switched on in order to operate the windscreen wipers. X Press the combination switch down or up to the desired position. Automatic wipe (vehicles with rain sen- sor) The rain sensor is only an aid. The driver is responsible for ensuring good visibility at all times. X Press the combination switch to the © position. In automatic wipe mode, the appropriate wiping frequency is set according to the intensity of the rain. X Use control : to set the wipe frequency. Switching on intermittent wiping X Press the combination switch to the © position. X Use control : to set the wipe frequency. Wiping with washer fluid X Pull the combination switch in the direc- tion of arrow î. Switching the rear window wiper on/off To operate the rear window wiper, the igni- tion must be switched on. X Turn the outer control on the combination switch to the desired position: Rg Rear window wiper off Rè Rear window wiper on Rî Wiper with washer fluid Activating/deactivating the rear win- dow wiper when reversing You can switch the "Automatic rear window wiper when reversing" setting on or off in the Using the windscreen wipers 89

Ensuring good visibility. Z

smart Media-System. The rear window wiper

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 99 · Applies to: 453

is automatically activated for a short while

when the ignition is switched on, the window

wipers are switched on and reverse gear is

engaged.

X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle

> Settings > Auto rear wipe with

reverse gear.

The selected setting is highlighted.

X Confirm the setting with Done.

Folding the sun visor to the side

Mirror cover ; Bracket = Retaining strap ? Vanity mirror X Fold the sun visor down. X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. X Fold the sun visor to one side 90 Folding the sun visor to the side

Ensuring good visibility.

Locking and unlocking the doors from

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 100 · Applies to: 453

the inside Using the door handle to unlock the door X Pull door handle :. If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To disable the alarm, switch on the ignition. Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: Ropen doors and endanger other persons or road users Rclimb out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves. Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Rreleasing the parking brake Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of chil- dren. X To lock: press button :. When the doors are locked, indicator lamp ; lights up. X To unlock: press button :. Activating and deactivating the auto- matic locking feature The activated automatic locking feature locks the vehicle automatically when the ignition is switched on and the vehicle is moving. X When the engine is running, press and hold button : for 5 seconds until a tone sounds. Repeat the procedure to deactivate the automatic locking feature. When the automatic locking function is activated, the locking mechanism engages audibly when you pull away. When the automatic locking function is deactivated, no sound occurs. Activating the double-lock function For United Kingdom only: the double-lock function prevents the doors from being opened from the inside. G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsu- pervised in the vehicle, particularly chil- Locking and unlocking the doors from the inside 91

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Z

dren, elderly people or people in need of

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 101 · Applies to: 453

special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (par- ticularly children) unattended in the vehi- cle. X Press button : twice. The double-lock function is enabled. Understanding the reversing feature The side windows are equipped with an auto- matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window from clos- ing during automatic operation, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. The auto- matic reversing feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for operating the side windows safely. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers Rwhile adjusting This means that the reversing feature can- not prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again. Opening and closing the windows Please note G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If some- body becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. G WARNING Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If you close a side window again immedi- ately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or max- imum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trap- ped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing proc- ess, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. The switches for both side windows are loca- ted on the driver's door. There is also a switch for the front-passenger window on the front- passenger door. The switch on the driver’s door takes precedence. 92 Opening and closing the windows

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

Opening and closing the windows

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 102 · Applies to: 453

Left side window ; Right side window X To open: press the switch. X To close: pull the switch. Opening and closing windows fully in automatic mode X To open the windows fully, press the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. X To close the windows fully, pull the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. X To stop automatic operation, press the switch again. Opening and closing the hinged win- dows of rear doors Opening the hinged windows X Fold the lever forwards. X Use the lever to push the hinged window out to the stop. X Push the lever back until as far as it will go. Closing the hinged windows X Fold the lever forwards. X Use the lever to pull in the hinged window. X Push the lever back until as far as it will go. Opening and closing the folding top G WARNING During opening and closing, body parts in the sweep of the folding top can get trap- ped. There is a risk of injury. When opening and closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep. Release the switch immediately if some- body becomes trapped. The opening or closing will stop. G WARNING Children could become trapped if they operate the folding top, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. ! Only open the folding top if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the folding top. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. Opening and closing the folding top 93

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Z

To open or close the folding top, the ignition

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 103 · Applies to: 453

must be switched on. X To open: press the switch to position : until the folding top is in the desired posi- tion. X To close: press the switch to position ; until the folding top is in the desired posi- tion. i It is possible to open or close the folding top while driving at speeds of up to 100 km/h. Operating the climate control system Useful information The climate control system is only available when the ignition is switched on. If the climate control system is deactivated, the air supply and circulation are switched off. The windows could mist up. You should therefore switch off the climate control sys- tem for brief periods only. In air-recirculation mode, only the air inside the vehicle is recirculated and no fresh air is introduced. This is useful in a tunnel or when there are unpleasant odours outside the vehicle. In air-recirculation mode, the win- dows may mist up more quickly, particularly when the outside temperature is low. There- fore, switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly. The integrated filter in the climate control system keeps out most particles of dust as well as pollen. The filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, always observe the interval for replacing the filter. Operating the automatic climate con- trol system Switching the automatic climate control system on and off The ignition must be switched on in order to operate the blower. The engine must be run- ning in order to operate all the functions of the automatic climate control system. X To switch on: press the à button. The indicator lamps below à and ¿ light up. X To switch off: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp below ^ lights up. Setting the temperature X Move the slider in small increments to the left or right. In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained at a constant level. The air dis- tribution and blower speed are regulated automatically. Setting and switching the air distribu- tion off X Press one or more of the ¯, P, O buttons. R¯ Demister vents RP Centre and side air vents RO Footwell vents Increasing the blower speed X Press the K button. 94 Operating the climate control system

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

Decreasing the blower speed

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 104 · Applies to: 453

X Press the I button. Activating/deactivating air-recircula- tion mode X Press the À button. The indicator lamp above À lights up when air-recirculation mode is activated. Switching "Cooling with air dehumidifi- cation" on or off The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function cools and dehumidifies the air inside the vehicle during warm weather. The engine must be running in order to use "Cooling with air dehumidification". X To switch on: press the K and ¿ button. The indicator lamp below ¿ lights up when the function is activated. In damp weather, only switch off the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function briefly. Otherwise the windows can mist up more quickly. Demisting the windscreen X Press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp above ¬ lights up when the windscreen is being demisted. Use this setting only until the windscreen is clear again. Demisting the rear window When the rear window heating is activated, the exterior mirrors are also heated. X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp above ¤ lights up when the rear window heating is activated. Use this setting only until the rear window is clear again. Drying windows that are misted up on the inside X Press the ¿ button. X Press the à button. X If the windows are still misted up, press the ¬ button. Use this setting only until the windows are clear again. Drying windows that are misted up on the outside X Switch on the windscreen wipers. X Press the ¬ button. Use this setting only until the windows are clear again. Setting the pre-entry climate control at departure time using the on-board com- puter Only for instrument cluster with colour dis- play: The "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" function heats or cools the vehicle interior before the scheduled departure time. The climate control runs until approx. 10 minutes after the set departure time. The vehicle must be connected to the charger in order to activate pre-entry climate con- trol. The battery charge and the charge out- put of the high-voltage battery must be suf- ficient. If pre-entry climate control cannot be oper- ated, a display message is shown in the on- board computer. X Call up Pre-heat/cool and charge in the on-board computer. X Press a. X Select one of the following settings: Rno pre-selection The pre-entry climate control is deacti- vated. RTwo stored departure times X Departure time > select Activate to acti- vate the stored departure time. If Smart- Charging was selected before, this setting is also activated. Operating the climate control system 95

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Z

X Departure time > select Change to change

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 105 · Applies to: 453

the settings of a stored departure time. X Set the value. X Select Smart-Charging or instant charg‐ ing. A display message is shown with the selec- ted settings. If Smart-Charging is selected, the high- voltage battery charges at minimum cost while also conserving battery life. Depending on the set departure time, charging of the high-voltage battery may not start immediately or may be interrup- ted during the charging process. i The charging station must support the transmission of tariff information in order for the optimised charging process with Smart-Charging to be possible. If the charging station does not provide tariff information, set the preferred charging times on the "smart control" website. i If instant charging is selected, the high-voltage battery is charged regard- less of the cost information. A part of the charging may not be conducted until one to two hours before the departure time, in order for temperature control of the high-voltage battery to be carried out for the intended departure time. Adjusting the air vents Please note G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle inte- rior. G WARNING If you pour cleaning fluid or disinfectant into the vehicle's ventilation system, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire. Never spray these or other agents into the ventilation system. Always have work on the ventilation system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Keep the following rules in mind for optimal climate control: RKeep the air slots between the service cover and windscreen clear of blockages. RDo not cover the vents or ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior. ROpen the air vents fully. Opening and closing the air vents X To open 1: turn the vent outwards. X To close 2: turn the vent inwards. Directing the air vents X Turn the air vents upwards, downwards, to the left or to the right as desired. Activating/deactivating the seat heat- ing and steering wheel heating G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion, the backrest pad and parts of the steering wheel to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a 96 Activating/deactivating the seat heating and steering wheel heating

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

limited ability to react to higher tempera-

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 106 · Applies to: 453

tures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly. ! When the seat heating is switched on, the seat surface can be damaged as a result of objects being placed on the seats, for example, seat cushions, child seats and protective covers not approved by Mercedes-Benz. Ensure that there are no objects on the seat surface when the seat heating is switched on. The seat heating only works when the igni- tion is switched on. Vehicles with the Winter package are additionally equipped with "Steering wheel heating" function : and the "Rear seat heating" function. The rear seat heating buttons are located on the surface of the rear seat armrests. X Press button =. Indicator lamp ; lights up when seat heating is activated. Vehicles with the Winter package: steering wheel heating : is also switched on when the driver's seat heating is activated. Using the accessories Using the cigarette lighter G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the ciga- rette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The cigarette lighter only works when the ignition is switched on. X Press cigarette lighter :. When cigarette lighter : is hot, it pops up automatically. Using the ash tray ! The cup holder in the centre console is not heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga- rettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is fully inserted in the cup holder. Make sure that lit cigarettes do not fall into the cup holder. Otherwise, the cup holder could be dam- aged. Using the accessories 97

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Z

X To open: lift up cover :.

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 107 · Applies to: 453

X To close: push down cover :. X To remove: pull the ashtray up and out. X To insert: insert the ashtray into the cup holder. Using the 12 V socket X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. X Lift up the cover of socket :. X Connect the device. The socket can be used for accessories up to a maximum draw of 120 W (15 A). If you use the socket for very long periods when the engine is switched off, the 12 V battery may discharge. Fitting and removing the floormats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehi- cle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's foot- well. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. X Slide the driver's seat backwards. X To install: press securing knobs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: release securing knobs : from retainers ;. Tablet bracket for iPad Air® Useful information iPad Air® tablets can be attached to the back of the front seats using the tablet bracket in the rear. The tablet bracket offers the following func- tions: RThe attachment can be rotated 180° allow- ing the iPad® to be used in portrait or land- scape mode. RThe attachment can be gently tilted allow- ing individual setting. Please note G WARNING The iPad® distracts the driver from the traffic situation. This could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. 98 Using the accessories

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

There is a risk of an accident.

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 108 · Applies to: 453

The driver must never use the iPad® while driving. Always keep the iPad® away from the driv- er's field of vision. G WARNING A bracket fitted in the vehicle without an attachment could be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants, for example in the event of an accident, braking or a sudden change in direction. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the entire tablet bracket is securely mounted in the fitting. When removing the iPad® or the attach- ment, remove the entire tablet bracket. ! When adjusting and folding the seats with the tablet bracket mounted, contact with adjacent components may occur. If a charging cable is connected to the tablet bracket, the charging cable or the USB port may be damaged. In order to avoid damage adjust the seats with the appropriate caution. When folding down the rear bench seat, ensure that the rear bench seat does not collide with the tablet bracket. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driv- ing when operating the tablet bracket for iPad Air®. Further information on the tablet bracket is available from any smart centre. Mounting the tablet bracket i Before mounting, ensure that no objects, e.g. coat hangers, are on the headrests. X Mount bracket : on the back of attach- ment ; until the bracket : audibly engages. X Insert tablet bracket ? with the bracket forwards into fitting = until the tablet bracket audibly engages. Affixing protective film G WARNING The display of the iPad® may shatter in an accident. If there is no protective film on the display, you or other passengers may receive eye injuries, for example, caused by fragments. There is a risk of injury. Ensure that the protective film is affixed to the display. Using the accessories 99

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Z

i To avoid air bubbles or dirt getting under

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 109 · Applies to: 453

the surface, observe the following tips: RDo not bend the protective film. RDo not touch the adhesive surface of the protective film. RUse disposable gloves to affix the pro- tective film. X Carefully clean the display of the iPad®. X The adhesive surface of the protective film is protected by a thin transparent backing film. Peel off half the backing film from the protective film. X Affix the upper edge of the protective film to the edge of the display by applying gen- tle pressure. X Slowly peel off the backing film from the protective film. At the same time, carefully apply pressure to the protective film with a suitable implement or plastic card such as a credit card and smooth over the sur- face. If air bubbles or dirt particles are present after attaching the protective film, proceed as follows: X Carefully remove the protective film from the display. X Remove dust and impurities. X Attach the protective film once again. Inserting an iPad Air® X Turn attachment : so that the opening faces the vehicle interior. X Insert iPad® with Lightning connection ; first into the attachment until the attach- ment audibly locks. X Move the attachment to the desired posi- tion. Charging the iPad Air® via the USB port The iPad Air® can be charged via the USB port on the tablet bracket. This additionally requires: Ra suitable USB adapter for the 12 V socket Ra suitable USB data cable for the USB adapter and USB port on the tablet bracket X Insert the USB adapter into the 12 V socket X Connect the USB data cable to the USB adapter and the USB port on the tablet bracket Removing an iPad Air® i The iPad® is not designed for the extreme temperatures which can be reached in a vehicle and may be damaged. For this rea- son, it is not recommended to leave the iPad® in a parked vehicle. X Turn the attachment so that the opening faces the vehicle interior. X Press button ; on the back of the tablet bracket. The attachment unlocks and the iPad® is pushed a little out of the bracket. X Remove iPad® :. 100 Using the accessories

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

Dismantling the tablet bracket

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 110 · Applies to: 453

X Press button ; on the bracket. X Pull the tablet bracket out of the fitting. X To remove the bracket from the attach- ment, press release button : on the attachment. Using the accessories 101

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Z

Parking

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 111 · Applies to: 453

Please note G WARNING When the engine is switched off, the auto- matic transmission shifts into neutral position N. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. Always shift to parking position P before switching off the engine. Secure the parked vehicle against rolling away by applying the parking brake. ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehi- cle or its drivetrain could be damaged. Parking the vehicle X Apply the parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Turn the key to position u in the ignition lock and remove it. X On steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels towards the kerb. X Lock the vehicle. Using the parking aid Useful information ! Pay attention to people and obstacles when manoeuvring or parking the car. The driver is responsible in these situations. The electronic parking aid gives an acoustic indication of the distance between the vehi- cle and an obstacle behind it. The parking aid uses three sensors : in the rear bumper to monitor the area around the vehicle. The parking aid measures the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle. If the proximity to the object behind the vehicle is less than 1.20 m, a short signal is issued. If the object is less than 30 cm away, a contin- uous warning tone is issued. The parking aid might not function correctly under the following circumstances: Rthe vehicle is on uneven terrain Rif there are obstacles below or above the sensor detection range Rthe vehicle is on snow or near objects that absorb ultrasonic waves Rthe vehicle is near strong ultrasonic sour- ces, such as pneumatic hammers If you engage reverse gear while the engine is running, the parking aid is activated. Activating and deactivating parking aid The parking aid is automatically activated when you start the engine. 102 Using the parking aid

Parking and getting out.

X Press the

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 112 · Applies to: 453

switch. When the parking aid is deactivated, the LED on the switch lights up. Using the reversing camera Please note The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the imme- diate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring or parking. ! If the rear of your vehicle is damaged, consult a qualified specialist workshop and have the reversing camera checked. ! Objects that are not at ground level appear further away than they actually are, for example: Rthe bumper of the vehicle parked behind Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe tail-end of a lorry Rslanted posts Only use the image from the reversing camera as a guide. You may otherwise damage your vehicle and/or the object. Understanding the reverse camera functions ! Pay attention to people and obstacles when manoeuvring or parking the car. The driver is responsible in these situations. ! If the rear of your vehicle is damaged, consult a qualified specialist workshop and have the reversing camera checked. The reversing camera is a visual parking and manoeuvring aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle with guide lines in the smart Media-System display. Reversing camera : is located in the smart logo in the tailgate. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image in the smart Media-System dis- play. The reversing camera may show a distorted view of obstacles or show them incorrectly or not at all if: Rthe obstacle is very close to the rear bumper Rthe obstacle is underneath the rear bumper Rthe obstacle is close to the tailgate handle Rthe reversing camera is covered by addi- tional accessories, e.g. a bicycle rack Rthe reversing camera function is impaired due to pixel errors The function of the reversing camera is limi- ted: Rif the tailgate is open Rif there is heavy rain, snowfall or fog Rif the light conditions are too dark or too bright Rif there is fluorescent light shining, e.g. under fluorescent lamps or LED lighting Rif the outside temperature changes quickly Rif the camera lens is dirty, obstructed or misted up(Y page 166) Rif the camera or the rear of your vehicle is damaged i The display contrast may be impaired due to incident sunlight or other light sources, e.g. if the vehicle is being driven out of a garage. In this case, pay special attention. i The use of the display can be considera- bly restricted due to pixel errors, for exam- Using the reversing camera 103

Parking and getting out. Z

ple. In this case have the display repaired

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 113 · Applies to: 453

or replaced.

Guide lines in the display

Useful information

! Objects that are not at ground level

appear further away than they actually

are, for example:

Rthe bumper of the vehicle parked behind

Rthe drawbar of a trailer

Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch

Rthe tail-end of a lorry

Rslanted posts

Only use the image from the reversing

camera as a guide. You may otherwise

damage your vehicle and/or the object.

Guide lines in different colours show the dis-

tance of obstacles from the rear of the vehi-

cle. Static guide lines do not change when the

steering wheel is turned. Dynamic guide

lines change depending on the position of

the steering wheel.

Static: vehicle width including exterior mirrors ; Green, static: approx. 1.50 m = Yellow, static: approx. 0.7 m ? Red, static: approx. 0.3 m A Blue, dynamic: vehicle width including exterior mirrors The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. Switching on the reversing camera The ignition must be switched on to use the reversing camera. X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle

Settings > Rear camera > Rear camera view settings > Rear camera view. X Confirm with Done. X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in the smart Media-System display. Switching off the reversing camera After driving forwards briefly, the reversing camera will switch itself off. Adjusting the reversing camera set- tings X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle Settings > Rear camera > Rear camera view settings. The following settings can be selected: RSwitch Rear camera view on or off. RSwitch Static guidelines on or off. RSwitch Dynamic guidelines on or off. X Select the desired settings. X Confirm with Done. Adjusting reversing camera display settings X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle Settings > Rear camera > Image settings. X Adjust the values for Brightness, Satura‐ tion and Contrast. X Confirm the display settings with Done. 104 Using the reversing camera

Parking and getting out.

Locking the vehicle

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 114 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: Rreleasing the parking brake Rshifting the transmission out of park position P Rstarting the vehicle's drive system There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. X Press the & button on the key. The turn signals flash twice. Priming and deactivating the anti- theft alarm system Useful information The immobiliser prevents the vehicle from being started without the correct key. It is switched on and off automatically. The anti-theft alarm system triggers a visual and audible alarm if a door, the tailgate or the service cover is opened. The alarm is not switched off, even if, for example, you close the open door that has triggered it. Priming X Close the doors. X Close the tailgate. X Close the service cover. X Press the & button on the key. The alarm system is primed after approx- imately 30 seconds. Deactivating and switching off the alarm X Press the % button on the key. Priming and deactivating the anti-theft alarm system 105

Parking and getting out. Z

Overview of the on-board computer

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 115 · Applies to: 453

Please note

G WARNING

If you operate information and communi-

cation equipment integrated in the vehicle

when driving, you could be distracted from

the traffic situation. This could also cause

you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a

risk of an accident.

Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. If you cannot be

sure of this, stop the vehicle paying atten-

tion to road and traffic conditions and

operate the equipment with the vehicle

stationary.

G WARNING

If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-

functioned, you may not recognise func-

tion restrictions relevant to safety. The

operating safety of your vehicle may be

impaired. There is a risk of an accident.

Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle

checked at a qualified specialist workshop

immediately.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is

impaired, you must park the vehicle safely as

soon as possible. Consult a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Display messages and displays in the

instrument cluster are only shown for cer-

tain systems. Vehicle owners and drivers are

responsible for ensuring that the vehicle is

operating safely. A vehicle which is not oper-

ating safely can cause an accident.

The display shows the outside temperature

on the far right in the header. Drivers must

pay special attention to road conditions

when temperatures are around freezing

point. Changes in the outside temperature

are displayed after a short delay.

After opening the door, the on-board com-

puter is activated for approximately

15 minutes. To permanently activate the on-

board computer, the ignition must be

switched on.

Monochrome display overview

Time

; Transmission display

= Lane Keeping Assist indicator lamp

? Outside temperature display and black

ice warning Ò

A Trip meter, remaining range, service dis-

play

B Tyre pressure monitor

C eco score display

D Brake lamp failure warning lamp

E Total distance recorder

F Cruise control, limiter

Colour display overview

Time ; Lane Keeping Assist indicator lamp = Digital speedometer ? Outside temperature display with black ice warning Ò A Display field for display messages, menus and lists B Remaining range C ECO mode, radar-based recuperation 106 Overview of the on-board computer

Operating the on-board computer.

D Transmission display

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 116 · Applies to: 453

E Cruise control, limiter

Calling up displays

Calling up displays (monochrome dis-

play)

Monochrome display

; Buttons on the multifunction lever

X To scroll forward at menu level, briefly

press the ´ button on multifunction

lever.

X To directly call up the trip meter, press and

hold the ´ button on multifunction

lever.

X Press and hold a on the multifunction

lever to reset the values.

The following displays can be called up one

after another:

Rtrip meter

Rremaining range

Rservice due date

Rsetting the time

Ractivating/deactivating Active Brake

Assist

Rrestarting the tyre pressure monitor

Calling up displays (colour display)

Calling up displays

Colour display ; Left control panel X Briefly press 9 or : on left control panel ;, to scroll forwards or backwards. X Press and hold 9 or : on left control panel ;, to directly call up the Distance display. The following displays can be called up one after another: RDistance RTrip computer from start RTrip computer from reset Reco score from start RFuel consumption bar chart REnergy flow RPre-heat/cool and charge RMessages and service RSettings RDigital speedometer Calling up displays 107

Operating the on-board computer. Z

Distance display

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 117 · Applies to: 453

Trip meter

; Total distance recorder

Trip computer display

Elapsed time

; Distance

= Average speed

? Average energy consumption

The data in the from start menu refers to the

start of the journey, whilst the data in the

from reset menu refers to the last time the

submenu was reset.

If the ignition remains switched off for lon-

ger than four hours, the from start values in

the instrument cluster are reset. The eco

score display is also reset automatically.

eco score display

The eco score display provides feedback on

how economical the driver's driving behav-

iour is (Y page 71).

If the ignition remains switched off for lon-

ger than four hours, the eco score display will

be automatically reset.

When the eco score display is reset, the from

start trip computer in the smart Media-Sys-

tem and the eco score display are also reset

in the smart Media-System.

Fuel consumption bar chart display

Energy consumption

; Recuperation

The display shows the average energy con-

sumption and recuperation over the previous

15 minutes.

Energy flow display

Total output ; Output for electrical consumers The total output shows the driver the sum of the energy currently flowing from the bat- tery. The colour of the battery shows whether energy is being consumed or recuperated: RBattery symbol is orange: energy is being consumed. RBattery symbol is green: energy is being recuperated. RBattery symbol is grey: energy consump- tion and recuperation are equal or both at 0 kW. The output for electrical consumers shows the driver what output is needed to operate electrical consumers, e.g. climate control systems or the radio. If the value is kept as low as possible, a greater range is achieved. 108 Calling up displays

Operating the on-board computer.

Pre-entry climate control and charging

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 118 · Applies to: 453

display

Time of the full charge

; Charge status of the battery

= Departure time

? Smart-Charging

A Charge current and charge output

An arrow underneath the battery indicates

the charge status of the battery at the depar-

ture time. The charge status and the time of

complete charge are only predicted approx-

imately. The time of complete charge cannot

be displayed when Smart-Charging is acti-

vated.

Information on the "Pre-entry climate con-

trol at departure time" function (Y page 95).

Messages and service display

Message memory ; Next service due date The display shows the number of display messages in the message memory and the next service due date. ¯ indicates a minor service. ° indi- cates a major service. To show the display messages, the ignition must be switched on. X Press a to scroll through the display messages. Current information on the type of service can be obtained at a smart centre or a quali- fied specialist workshop. Digital speedometer display The display shows the digital speedometer. The digital speedometer in the header is hid- den. United Kingdom only: the digital speedome- ter in the header continues to be displayed. Setting values Setting values (monochrome display) Setting the time X Press ´ repeatedly until ° is shown next to the time. X Press a until the hour display flashes. X Set values. Deactivating or activating Active Brake Assist X Press ´ several times until Ä and ° are displayed. X Press a until on or OFF appears below Ä. The ^ indicator lamp lights up when Active Brake Assist is deactivated. Resetting values The trip meter display and eco score display can be reset. X Scroll to the desired display. X Press a for three seconds. Setting values (colour display) Setting values X Press 9 or : to scroll to Settings. X Press 9 or : to scroll to the desired menu. Setting values 109

Operating the on-board computer. Z

X Press 9 or : to set the desired data.

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 119 · Applies to: 453

X Press a to confirm. Resetting values X Press a. X Select yes and press a to confirm. Setting the time X Select Settings > Time > Set the time. X Set values. Vehicles with smart Media-System: the time and time format are set in the smart Media-System. Setting the time format X Select Settings > Time > 12/24 Time for‐ mat. X Set the value. Adjusting the instrument cluster light- ing X Select Settings > Display > Display/ switch brightness. X Set the value. Displaying the digital speedometer in the header X Select Settings > Display > Digital speedometer. X Select the Disp. addit. dig. speedo. function. The digital speedometer is displayed in the header. England only: the digital speedometer in the header cannot be hidden. Setting the unit for speed in the digital speedometer X Select Settings > Display > Digital speedometer > Unit. X Set the value. The following values are set: RDigital speedometer display RDigital speedometer in the header England only: only the display unit of the digital speedometer is set. Setting the unit of measurement for dis- tance X Select Settings > Display > Units of distance. X Set the value. Setting the temperature unit X Select Settings > Display > Units of temperature. X Set the value. Switching radar-based recuperation off and on To switch on radar-based recuperation, the conditions for activation must be fulfilled and the ignition must be switched on. X Select Settings > Radar assist.recuper‐ ation > on or off. Information on radar-based recuperation (Y page 69). Deactivating or activating Active Brake Assist The ignition must be switched on in order to set Active Brake Assist. X Select Settings > Active Brake Assist > on or off. Information on Active Brake Assist (Y page 57). Starting the tyre pressure monitor X Select Settings > Tyre pressure monitor. Information on the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 161). Switching ambient lighting on/off X Select Settings > Ambient lighting > On. 110 Setting values

Operating the on-board computer.

Setting the brightness of the ambient

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 120 · Applies to: 453

lighting X Select Settings > Ambient lighting > Brightness. X Set the value. Setting the language X Select Settings > Language (Language). X Set the value. Setting values 111

Operating the on-board computer. Z

Operating and setting the smart Audio-

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 121 · Applies to: 453

System

smart Audio-System overview

G WARNING

If you operate information and communi-

cation equipment integrated in the vehicle

when driving, you could be distracted from

the traffic situation. This could also cause

you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a

risk of an accident.

Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. If you cannot be

sure of this, stop the vehicle paying atten-

tion to road and traffic conditions and

operate the equipment with the vehicle

stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for

the country in which you are currently driv-

ing when operating the smart Audio-System.

Number keys 1 - 6 ; C Previous station or track = USB1 port and bracket connection for mobile phone with smart cross connect app ? D Next station or track A % Goes back one menu level higher B Control for menu selection and station list, 9 button C USB2 port D Ã Telephone menu to accept or reject calls E ª System settings F 8 Mute G Õ Plays back media from external data carriers H $ Switches on the radio and selects the waveband I External audio equipment (AUX connec- tion) J Volume control, Ü button K F Sets the radio text Operating and setting the smart Audio- System X To switch on or off: press Ü. X To scroll through menus: turn control B. X To select menu options: turn control B and press the 9 button. X To navigate to the next-highest folder: press the % button. X To set values: turn control B and press the 9 button. X To increase or decrease the volume: turn control J. Using external devices Useful information You can connect the following external devi- ces: RUSB devices, iPods® and MP3 players (USB port) RExternal audio equipment (AUX connec- tion) RBluetooth® devices, such as mobile phones External devices can be charged at USB ports = and C when the ignition is switched on. It is better to use USB port = for charging as it supplies a higher charge current. To charge an external device remove the cover on USB port =. Using the smartphone bracket Useful information i Operating smartphones in the smart- phone bracket is permitted exclusively in connection with the smart cross connect app. 112 Operating and setting the smart Audio-System

Using the smart Audio-System.

The smartphone bracket keeps your mobile

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 122 · Applies to: 453

phone secured in the vehicle. In order to use the smart cross connect app, rotate the mobile phone to landscape mode. You can use the USB port behind the smart- phone bracket on the left to charge your mobile phone during the journey with a suit- able charging cable. Mobile phones and other USB devices can be charged when the igni- tion is switched on. The smartphone bracket is suitable for mobile phones with the following dimen- sions: Rthickness: 6 – 10 mm Rwidth: 55 – 82 mm Rlength: 120 – 162 mm Further information is available from any smart centre. Removing and fastening the cover of the USB1 port X To remove: turn the cover anti-clockwise using handle :. X Press on marking ;. X Remove the cover. X To secure: place the cover in position ;. X Turn the cover clockwise using handle :. Fitting the smartphone bracket X Remove the cover from the USB1 port. X Connect the smartphone bracket to USB1 and turn the locking mechanism clock- wise. Inserting and removing the mobile phone X To insert: press the right-hand raised but- ton on the bottom edge of the smartphone bracket. The upper tensioning arm opens. X If necessary, press the left-hand button on the bottom edge of the smartphone bracket. The tensioning arms on the side open. X Set the mobile phone in the smartphone bracket. X If necessary, press the tensioning arms on the side together to set them to the size of the mobile phone. X Press down the upper tensioning arms to secure the mobile phone. X To remove: press the right-hand raised button on the bottom edge of the smart- phone bracket. The upper tensioning arm opens. X Remove the mobile phone from the smart- phone bracket. Operating the smart Audio-System via the mobile phone You can use the smart cross connect app for iOS and Android™ to operate the smart Audio-System via a mobile phone. X Download the smart cross connect app from the App Store® (iOS) or Google Play™ (Android™) and install it on the mobile phone. X Connect the mobile phone with the smart Audio-System via Bluetooth®. X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket. Further information about operating the smart Audio-System via mobile phone can be found in the smart cross connect app user's guide. Adjusting the system settings Setting the system language X Press the ª button. X Select Language. The list of languages appears. X Select the language. Operating and setting the smart Audio-System 113

Using the smart Audio-System. Z

Switching the time on or off

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 123 · Applies to: 453

X Press the ª button. X Select Clock. X Select ON or OFF. Setting the time X Press the ª button. X Select Clock. X Select Set Time. X Set the time. Setting the time format X Press the ª button. X Select Clock. X Select Format. X Choose one of the following time formats: RAm/Pm R24hr Adjusting the audio settings Adjusting the sound X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. X Select Sound. X Select the desired sound settings: RBass: adjusts the bass. RTreble: adjusts the treble. RBal.: adjusts the surround sound (bal- ance) to left or right. RFade: adjusts the surround sound (bal- ance) to the front or back. Switching the bass boost on or off (vehi- cles without JBL sound system) X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. X Select Bass Boost. X Select ON or OFF. Resetting audio settings X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. X Select Audio Default. X Select Yes . Adjusting the volume to the vehicle speed (vehicles without JBL sound sys- tem) X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. X Select Speed Vol.. X Select the desired level. The higher the level, the higher the volume will be at increasing road speeds. Listening to the radio Switching on the radio X Press the Ü button. X Press the $ button. The smart Audio-System receives data transmitted via the Radio Data System (RDS). Selecting a waveband X Press the $ button repeatedly until the desired waveband appears. If available, you can switch between the fol- lowing wavebands: RFM1 RFM2 RDR1 (digital radio) RDR2 (digital radio) RAM Selecting stations manually FM and AM waveband X Press the D or C button to set the desired frequency. 114 Listening to the radio

Using the smart Audio-System.

Digital radio frequency range

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 124 · Applies to: 453

X To select the desired station, press the D or C button. Setting a station from the station list X Press a in radio mode. The station list appears. X Select a station. X Press a to confirm. Updating the station list X Press the $ button until you hear a tone. Storing a station X Select a waveband. X Set the station. X Press a number key 1 to 6 until you hear a tone. The station set for this waveband will be saved at the button you have pressed. Selecting a stored station X Select a waveband. X Press a number key for the stored station. Switching traffic announcements on/off X Press the ª button. X Select Radio. X Select TA. X Select ON or OFF. Interrupting a traffic announcement X During a traffic announcement, briefly press %. Displaying radio text in FM radio X Press the F button. If radio text is available, it will be dis- played. Digital radio (if available) Information on DAB i Any electronic devices taken into the vehicle may seriously impair radio and DAB radio reception. Digital radio or DAB (Digital Audio Broad- casting) is a digital transmission standard optimally designed for the mobile reception of radio transmissions. Several programmes are combined into so-called ensembles and transmitted on a single frequency. Some sta- tions only transmit programmes at certain times. If you have selected a programme that has subsequently been removed from the ensemble, it will no longer be received. You will continue to receive the other pro- grammes in the ensemble. Select either a dif- ferent programme or a different ensemble. i DAB cannot be received everywhere in Europe. Displaying radio text This function provides additional data transmitted in the DAB waveband (DR1 and DR2). Besides displaying the artist and track names, information on the current pro- gramme may also be available. X Press the F button. X Select Radio text. The î dot shows that radio text is acti- vated. Setting alerts If this function is activated, certain pro- gramme categories allow another broadcast to interrupt the current audio playback. Numerous categories can be selected, such as news, business news, sports news etc. A prerequisite for the reception is that broadcasters process the relevant informa- tion. This function is only available in cer- tain countries. Listening to the radio 115

Using the smart Audio-System. Z

X Call up the setup menu (Y page 113).

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 125 · Applies to: 453

X Radio > DR Interrupt > Select the desired category. The î dot shows the active settings. i Several categories can be selected. Repeat the procedure if necessary. Displaying the EPG EPG (Electronic Program Guide) is available in the DAB waveband (DR1 and DR2). If the station supports EPG, you can use the EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) to display the current and the following two radio pro- grammes. At the very least, the programme overview contains the name, time and length of each programme. X Press the F button. X Select EPG. X Select the desired station. Switching on Intellitext™ If the station supports Intellitext™, you can have additional information displayed, such as news, headlines, business news, sports news etc. A prerequisite for the reception is that broadcasters process the relevant infor- mation. Intellitext™ is only available in cer- tain countries. X Press the F button. X Select Intellitext. Using a mobile phone Connecting a mobile phone Useful information The Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone must be compatible with the smart Audio-System. Overview of compatible mobile phones: http://www.smart.com/connect. To make a call, Bluetooth® must be activated on the mobile phone and the smart Audio- System. Once outside the Bluetooth® reception range, the connection is terminated automatically. To clearly identify a mobile phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Activating Bluetooth® on a mobile phone X Activate Bluetooth® on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instruc- tions). X Search for devices. Switching on the Bluetooth® function of the smart Audio-System X Press the à button. X Turn control B to Bluetooth and confirm with 9. X Turn control B to ON and confirm with 9. The î dot shows the active setting. Authorising a mobile phone on the smart Audio-System X Press the à button. X Select Scan devices. The system searches for available mobile phones and displays them in a list. X Select the mobile phone and confirm with 9. X Do one of the following: Rif a code appears in the smart Audio- System display and on the mobile phone, confirm it on the mobile phone Rif the code 0000 appears in the smart Audio-System display, enter it and con- firm it on the mobile phone A maximum of five mobile phones can be authorised. However, only one authorised mobile phone can be connected with Blue- tooth® at a time. Loading and updating the phone book X Press the à button. X Select Settings > PB download. X If necessary, accept the access confirma- tion on the mobile phone. If the mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) profile, the phone book and call lists will be transferred after you connect. 116 Using a mobile phone

Using the smart Audio-System.

Removing a mobile phone from the list

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 126 · Applies to: 453

(de-authorising) X Press the à button. X Select Del. device. Authorised mobile phones are displayed. X Select the mobile phone to be removed. X Select YES. After de-authorisation, the Bluetooth® con- nection to the mobile phone is no longer established automatically. Connecting another authorised mobile phone X Activating Bluetooth® on a mobile phone X Press the à button. X Select Sel. device. All authorised mobile phones are dis- played. The currently connected mobile phone is indicated by a dot. X Select the desired mobile phone from the list. Setting the sound Adjusting the call volume X Press the à button. X Select Settings > Volume > Call. X Select the setting. Switching the smart Audio-System ring- tone on and off X Press the à button. X Select Settings > Ringtone. X To switch on: select Car. X To switch off: select Phone. Adjusting the ringtone volume X Press the à button. X Select Settings > Volume > Ring. X Select the setting. Telephone operation Calling a contact from the phone book To call a contact in the phone book, the mobile phone telephone book first has to be imported into the smart Audio-System. X Press the à button. X Select Telephone book. X Select the contact. The details for the contact are displayed. X Dial the selected phone number. X Press the 9 button. Dialling a number X Press the à button. X Select Dial a number. An input screen appears. X Enter the number. X Press the 9 button. X Select ;. Using call lists to call contacts To call a contact in a call list, the mobile phone telephone book first has to be impor- ted into the smart Audio-System. X Press the à button. X Select Call lists. X Select Dialed, Received or Missed. X Select an entry from the list. Calling the last number dialled X Press and hold the à button until the call is established. Accepting a call X Press the à button. Rejecting a call X Press and hold the à button until the call is rejected. Using a mobile phone 117

Using the smart Audio-System. Z

Holding and continuing a call

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 127 · Applies to: 453

X To place a call on hold: select Â. X To continue the call: press the 9 button. Transferring a call to the mobile phone X Select z. X To transfer the call back to the smart Audio-System: press 9. Entering numbers or characters during a call X Select #123. X Enter numbers or characters. Ending a call X Press the 9 button. Using voice control of the mobile phone Useful information Voice control of the connected mobile phone can be used (see manufacturer's operating instructions). Not all voice control services are supported by the smart Audio-System. Voice control must be activated in the set- tings menu of the mobile phone. Starting voice control of the mobile phone X Connect the mobile phone with the smart Audio-System via Bluetooth®. X Press the button on the steering wheel. A message appears in the display of the smart Audio-System and a tone sounds. Voice control of the mobile phone is active. X Say a command. Ending voice control of the mobile phone X Press the button on the steering wheel. or X Press the 9 button. Voice control of the mobile phone is ended. Operating external data storage media Useful information You can switch between the following media sources, depending on the type of external data carrier connected: RUSB 1 or iPod 1 RUSB 2 or iPod 2 RAUX (external audio equipment) RBT Audio (with Bluetooth® connected device, such as a mobile phone) Selecting external data carriers X Press the Õ button repeatedly until the desired media source appears in the dis- play. Operating a USB device or iPod® Connecting a device X Connect the device to the USB port. The device is activated automatically and the first track is played. Selecting a track X In USB mode, press the 9 button. Available tracks or folders are displayed. X Turn control B. X Press 9 to confirm. Rapid search X Press the 9 button. An entry field appears. X To enter characters, turn control B and press the 9 button. 118 Operating external data storage media

Using the smart Audio-System.

Skipping to the next or previous track

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 128 · Applies to: 453

X Press the D or C button briefly to skip to the next track or press longer for rapid scrolling. Switching random track sequence on/off X Press the C button. Switching the repeat function on/off X Press the number key. Selecting a track from a category with an iPod® connected X Press the 9 button. X Select the category from a list. Different categories, such as playlists, artists or albums, can be selected, depend- ing on the connected device. Displaying metadata X Press the F button repeatedly until the desired metadata is displayed. Operating external audio equipment (AUX) Connecting a device X Connect the device to the AUX jack. Use the Õ button to access the media on a connected AUX device. Adjusting the volume of external audio equipment X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. X Select AUX In. X Select one of the following options for the volume: RLow RMedium RHigh Bluetooth® device operation Connecting a device X Connect a Bluetooth® audio device the same way you connect a mobile phone with Bluetooth®. Skipping to the next or previous track X Press the D or C button briefly to skip to the next track or press longer for rapid scrolling. Displaying metadata X Press the F button repeatedly until the desired metadata is displayed. Operating external data storage media 119

Using the smart Audio-System. Z

Operating and setting up the smart

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 129 · Applies to: 453

Media-System

Operating the smart Media-System

Please note

Some functions are restricted while driving.

Controls

:

Switches voice control system on

and off, accepts and ends a phone call

; W Increases the volume

= X Reduces the volume

? smart Media-System display

Voice control system

The following functions are possible using

the voice control system of the smart Media-

System:

Renter a destination for navigation

Rmake a call

Rstart an application

Controls on the smart Media-System

Previous station or track and fast rewind

; Mute

= Next station or track and fast forward

? Switches to the home screen

A Ü On/off button and volume control

B Touchscreen

Ports on the centre console

Port for external audio equipment (AUX) ; USB port = SD card slot Some devices, for example mobile phones or USB drives, connect with the smart Media- System via USB port ;. External devices with 5 V (1 A) can be charged on USB port ; when the ignition is switched on. 120 Operating and setting up the smart Media-System

Using the smart Media-System.

Overview of home screen

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 130 · Applies to: 453

Radio station, media track ; Number of messages in the message memory = Status of the mobile phone and field strength of the mobile phone network ? Outside temperature A Time B Map C Next navigation manoeuvre D Context menu E Distance to the destination and estima- ted time of arrival F Favourites menu G Main menu H Telephone menu, status of the mobile phone and field strength of the mobile phone network X To call up a function, tap on an area on the home page or on a symbol. The following functions can be selected: R:: to switch to radio or media application R;: to call up message memory R=: to switch to telephone application R?: to call up the weather forecast for the current location RA: to display time and temperature in full screen or to call up time settings RB: to switch to full screen navigation view RD: to change language, change home page, remove an SD card or switch off the display RF: to view, call up or change favourites RG: to call up the main menu RH: to switch to telephone application i The home screen can be set to display the energy flow. If the home page is set so as to display the eco score, you can switch to the eco score appli- cation by tapping on the area. When Android Auto™ or MirrorLink® is active, another symbol is displayed on the home page. You can switch to the relevant smart- phone screen application by tapping on the symbol. Switching the smart Media-System on and off Switching on automatically X Start the engine. Switching off automatically X Switch off the ignition and open the door. Switching on and off manually X Press the Ü button. Restarting X Press the Ü button. The smart Media-System shuts down and restarts. i The restart can take several minutes. During the restart, the audio volume can- not be adjusted. Scrolling through a menu or list on the touchscreen X Touch the touchscreen with your finger. X Swipe up, down, left or right. The selection on the display will then move in the respective direction. Selecting items on the touchscreen X Tap on a menu, an option or an application with one finger. The menu, the option or the application is launched. Operating and setting up the smart Media-System 121

Using the smart Media-System.

Controlling media playback on the

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 131 · Applies to: 453

touchscreen X Swipe to the left. The next media item is played or dis- played, e.g. the next track or station. X Swipe to the right. Playback is restarted or the previous media item is played or displayed, e.g. the previous track. Media playback can be controlled in the fol- lowing playback modes: RRadio mode RMusic and audio playback RImage playback RVideo playback Calling up menus X Select Menu on the home screen. X Select one of the following submenus. Submenus: RMultimedia Radio and media playback RNavigation Navigation system RTelephone Mobile phone functions RVehicle Reversing camera, eco score, energy flow and consumption details RServices TomTom Services RSystem General system settings Confirming settings X Select Done. Settings are accepted. Switching off the display X Select home page > W > Switch off screen. Adjusting the system settings Adjusting the display Setting the daytime brightness X Select System > Display . X Move the Daytime brightness control to the left or right. Setting the night time brightness X Select System > Display . X Move the Nighttime brightness control to the left or right. Activating automatic switching between day and night mode X Select System > Display > Automatic day/ night mode. Displaying day mode constantly X Select System > Display. X Remove the tick for Automatic day/night mode and Force night mode. Displaying night mode constantly X Select System > Display > Force night mode. Setting the system language X Select System > Language. A list of available languages is displayed. X Select the desired language. i The language of the spoken navigation announcement can be selected independ- ently of the system language. Changing the on-screen keyboard X Select System > Keyboards. X Select the keyboard layout. The following keyboard layouts can be selected: RLatin RGreek RCyrillic For the Latin keyboard layout, it is possible to choose between the ABCD, QWERTY, AZERTY and QWERTZ layouts. 122 Operating and setting up the smart Media-System

Using the smart Media-System.

Selecting the home screen display

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 132 · Applies to: 453

Different displays are available for the home page which display up-to-date information about the applications in the smart Media- System. X Select System > Home page . A selection of home screen displays appears. X Select the desired display. Resetting to factory settings X Select System > Restore factory set‐ tings. X Confirm with Yes. All settings changed in the system return to the default values. All destinations, routes and favourites will be deleted. Setting the time manually X Select System > Clock > Set time. X Change the minutes and hours of the time shown. Activating automatic time adjustment X Select System > Clock > Set time > Auto‐ matic time adjustment. Setting the time format X Select System > Clock > Time format. X Select the time format. The following time formats can be selec- ted: R18:00 R6:00 PM R6:00 Displaying status and information X Select System > Status & Information. X Select the information. The following information can be selected: RVersion information Software and hardware of the Media- System RGPS status Current GPS signal strength RNetwork status Signal strength of the data connection RLicences For free and open-source software used RCopyright For text in the TomTom software used. Adjusting the audio settings Setting the volume X Select System > Sound > Sound levels. X Select the volume setting. The following volume settings can be selected: RMain volume For the whole system RHands-free For the hands-free system RRingtone Ring tone volume RNavigation Volume for the whole navigation system RComputer voice Volume of the computer-generated voice RApp events Volume of events triggered by apps X Set the desired volume. Adjusting the volume to the vehicle speed (vehicles without JBL sound sys- tem) The speed-dependent volume adjustment function adapts the volume to the current vehicle speed. X Select System > Sound > Speed sensitiv‐ ity volume. X Move the Speed dependency control to the left or right. The higher the value, the more the volume increases with the speed of the vehicle. Volume adjustment is not set using the con- trol but automatically. Operating and setting up the smart Media-System 123

Using the smart Media-System.

Adjusting surround sound (balance)

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 133 · Applies to: 453

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound >

Balance > Manual.

X Move the control to the desired position.

X Fade: adjusts the surround sound (bal-

ance) to the front or back.

X Confirm with Done.

Adjusting the bass and treble

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound >

Bass/Treble > Manual.

X Use the control to adjust the bass and tre-

ble separately.

Setting a neutral sound for the bass and

treble

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound >

Bass/Treble > Neutral.

Audio is played without increasing the

bass or treble.

Activating and deactivating arkamys®

bass boost (vehicles without JBL sound

system)

The arkamys® bass boost setting emphasises

the bass during playback.

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Bass

boost Arkamys.

Manual activation of arkamys® bass boost on

models with a JBL sound system is not pos-

sible. Activation functions automatically.

Setting the volume for warning tones

X Select System > Sound > Alerts.

X Move the control to the left or right.

Enabling warning tones when the display

is switched off

X Select System > Sound > Alerts > Keep

audio alerts when screen turned off.

Creating and deleting favourites

Creating favourites

Preset ; Navigation = Radio ? Telephone A Services B Context menu Frequently used settings such as phone con- tacts and radio stations can be stored as favourites. Six favourites can be stored for each of the following categories: RNavigation RRadio RTelephone RServices X Select Favourites on the home screen. X Select a category. X Select the next empty memory position. A list of possible favourites appears. X Select favourites. Deleting favourites X Select Favourites on the home screen. X Select W > Remove a Favourite. X Delete a favourite. The following options can be selected: RSelect the favourite you wish to delete and confirm with Delete. RTo delete all favourites, select Remove all Favourites. 124 Operating and setting up the smart Media-System

Using the smart Media-System.

Listening to the radio

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 134 · Applies to: 453

Switching on the radio

X Select Multimedia > Radio.

Display modes

Useful information

In radio mode there are three different dis-

play modes, in which various settings can be

made:

R"List" display mode (FM and digital radio)

R"Frequency" display mode (AM and FM

radio)

R"Presets" display mode

"List" display mode (FM and digital

radio)

Selects the waveband (AM/FM/DAB radio)

and preset group (FM/DAB)

; Selects the previous station

= Selects the next station

? Context menu

A "Frequency" display mode

B "List" display mode

C "Presets" display mode

D Station currently playing

"Frequency" display mode (AM and FM

radio)

Selects the waveband (AM/FM radio) and

preset group (FM)

; Increases or decreases the frequency in

small increments

= Station search, forwards or backwards

? Context menu

A Adjusts the frequency manually

B Station currently playing

"Presets" display mode

Selects the waveband (AM/FM/DAB radio) and preset group (FM/DAB) ; Stored station = Context menu ? Station currently playing Selecting a station "List" display mode X Swipe up or down in the station list. X Tap on the desired station. Listening to the radio 125

Using the smart Media-System.

"Frequency" display mode (AM and FM

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 135 · Applies to: 453

radio) X Slide control on the waveband left or right. Starting a station search X Select C or D in the "Frequency" display mode. Storing a station X Set the station. X Select W > Save as preset. Up to six stations can be stored for each waveband. Displaying radio text Radio text contains information such as cur- rent track or latest news. X Select W > Show radio text. Displaying digital radio services X Select W > DR services. X Select one of the following digital radio services: REPG (Electronic Programme Guide) Programme schedule for the station cur- rently playing RIntellitext Programme information and programme schedule for the station currently play- ing RSlide show Displays images to accompany the cur- rent broadcast Other radio settings Searching for alternative frequencies with the best possible reception quality X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > AF (Alternative frequency). Receiving traffic reports (i-Traffic) X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > i- Traffic (Traffic program). Displaying the programme type (e.g. classical) X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > PTY (Program type). Switching to the corresponding FM sta- tion when digital radio reception is poor X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > Simulcast. Displaying information on certain cate- gories (i-Announcement, digital radio only) X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > i- Announcement. X Select an i-Announcements category. Updating the station list X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > Update radio list. Displaying energy consumption Calling up the energy flow display X Select Menu > Vehicle > Energy consump‐ tion > Energy flow. The Energy flow display shows the flow of energy in the vehicle. The colour of the energy flow indicates the following: RGreen colouring: energy is being recuper- ated ROrange colouring: the drive is consuming energy RYellow colouring and an illustration of the consumers: electrical consumers are con- suming energy RGrey colouring: no energy is being recu- perated or consumed 126 Displaying energy consumption

Using the smart Media-System.

Calling up the detailed consumption

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 136 · Applies to: 453

display X Select Menu > Vehicle > Energy consump‐ tion > Consumption details. The Consumption details display shows the energy consumption of the drive and elec- trical consumers as well as the energy recu- perated during the previous 15 minutes. The display also shows the total consumption of the drive and electrical consumers as well as the total amount of energy recuperated dur- ing the current journey. The Consumption details display is reset each time the engine is switched on. Using a mobile phone Connecting a mobile phone Please note G WARNING The electromagnetic radiation from two- way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics if they are manipulated or ret- rofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you operate two-way radios incorrectly in the vehicle, their electromagnetic radi- ation can interfere with the vehicle elec- tronics, for example if: Rthe two-way radio is not connected to an exterior aerial Rthe exterior aerial is not correctly moun- ted or is not low-reflection This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fit- ted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low- reflection exterior aerial. Bluetooth® must be enabled both on the mobile phone and on the smart Media-Sys- tem. Enabling and disabling Bluetooth® The mobile phone must be compatible with the smart Media-System. Overview of compatible mobile phones: https://www.smart.com/connect. X Select Settings > Turn Bluetooth on. The setting is marked. Bluetooth® is ena- bled or disabled on the smart Media-Sys- tem. Authorising a mobile phone Authorising a mobile phone for the first time Bluetooth® must be enabled on the smart Media-System. X Select Phone menu. X Confirm the display message with Yes. X Enter the security code on the mobile phone or accept access confirmation (see manufacturer's operating instructions). The Enabling Bluetooth message appears. Authorising another mobile phone Bluetooth® must be enabled on the smart Media-System. X Select Settings > Manage devices. The list of visible mobile phones appears. X Select the mobile phone from the list. X Enter the security code on the mobile phone or accept access confirmation (see manufacturer's operating instructions). The Bluetooth® connection is established. The Bluetooth® connection will be estab- lished automatically in future. Using a mobile phone 127

Using the smart Media-System. Z

Downloading telephone data automati-

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 137 · Applies to: 453

cally X Select Settings > Automatically down‐ load phone data. X If necessary, accept the access confirma- tion on the mobile phone. During connection, up to 1,000 contacts are automatically transferred to the smart Media-System. Connecting another authorised mobile phone X Select Settings > Manage devices. X Select the mobile phone. The current Bluetooth® connection is ter- minated. The desired mobile phone is con- nected to the smart Media-System instead. Removing a mobile phone from the list X Select Settings > Manage devices. X Select W > Delete device(s). X Select the mobile phone. X Select Delete. Terminating a Bluetooth® connection X Select Settings > Manage devices. X Select W > Disconnect all devices. X Select the mobile phone. If the mobile phone leaves the Bluetooth® receiver range, the connection is automati- cally terminated. Telephone operation Useful information The following conditions must be fulfilled in order to make a 999 or 112 emergency call: Ra valid and operational SIM card is inser- ted in the mobile phone Ra mobile phone network is available Calling a contact from the phone book X Select Phonebook. X Select the contact. X Select the contact's telephone number. If the phone book contains multiple contacts, they can be called up using Find. Dialling a phone number X Select Dial a number. X Enter a number on the keypad. X Select Call. Calling a contact from the call log X Select Call logs. X Select an entry from the list. The call log can be sorted according to calls made, calls received and missed calls using the corresponding receiver icon. Accepting and rejecting an incoming call If a call is incoming, the following informa- tion will appear on the display: Rname of caller, if already in the phone book Rnumber of caller, if name of caller is not already in the phone book RPrivate number, if the caller has the "Hide caller ID" function switched on X To accept the call, select Pick up. X To reject the call, select Refuse. The call will be forwarded to voicemail. Holding and continuing a call X Select W > Put on hold. X To continue the call, select Resume. Transferring a call to the mobile phone X Select W > Handset. Ending a call X Select End call. 128 Using a mobile phone

Using the smart Media-System.

Using the smartphone screen applica-

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 138 · Applies to: 453

tion Selecting settings for the smartphone screen Selecting the preferred smartphone screen application If mobile phones support Android Auto™ as well as MirrorLink®, the preferred applica- tion can be selected when a mobile phone is connected. X Select System > Smartphone Screen > Smartphone Screen application pref‐ erence. X Select Android Auto™ or MirrorLink®. Selecting settings to start Android Auto™ and MirrorLink® X Select System > Smartphone Screen > Android Auto™ Settings. or X Select System > Smartphone Screen > Mir‐ rorLink™ Settings. X Select one of the following settings: RAsk me at each launch If the smartphone has been connected with the smart Media-System, you will be asked whether the preferred smart- phone screen application should be started. RYes If the smartphone has been connected with the smart Media-System, the pre- ferred smartphone screen application will be started automatically. RNo If the smartphone has been connected with the smart Media-System, a smart- phone screen application will not be started. Using MirrorLink® Useful information MirrorLink® is a standard for the connection between the smart Media-System and a mobile phone. With MirrorLink®, the content of the display on your mobile phone can be displayed in the smart Media-System. MirrorLink® is available for mobile phones with the Android™ operating system. Further information: http://www.smart.com/ connect. To use MirrorLink®, observe the following requirements: Rthe mobile phone must support Mirror- Link® version 1.1 and above Rthe mobile phone is switched on Ra MirrorLink® certified app must be instal- led on the mobile phone Rthe GPS connection must be activated on the mobile phone Rthe time is set on the smart Media-System Setting up a connection X Activate MirrorLink® on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instruc- tions). X Connect a mobile phone with a connecting cable to the USB socket in the centre con- sole. X Select Yes. Apps which have been certified for Mir- rorLink® will be shown in the smart Media- System display. Calling up MirrorLink® apps X Tap on the home page of the smart Media-System. MirrorLink® starts in the smart Media- System display. X Select the desired app. The display switches to full screen mode. X To leave full screen display: press and hold the ò button on the smart Media-Sys- tem until the lower bar is shown. X To leave the display: select 2. MirrorLink® audio playback If your mobile phone supports this function, you can control audio playback via the but- tons on the smart Media-System. X To select the previous track: press the 9 button. X To rewind: press and hold the 9 button. X To select the next track: press the : button. Using a mobile phone 129

Using the smart Media-System. Z

X To fast forward: press and hold the :

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 139 · Applies to: 453

button. X To mute: press the 8 button. Terminating a MirrorLink® connection X Select W > Disconnect. Using Android Auto™ Useful information Android Auto™ is an application for the con- nection between the smart Media-System and a mobile phone. Certain mobile phone functions and apps can be controlled via the smart Media-System with Android Auto™. Functions such as telephony, navigation and the audio playback of Android Auto™ are dis- played on the home page of the smart Media- System. Android Auto™ is available for mobile phones with the Android™ operating system. Further information: http://www.smart.com/ connect. In order to use Android Auto™, the following conditions must be met: Rthe mobile phone supports Android Auto™ starting from Android™ 5.0 Rthe mobile phone is switched on Rthe mobile phone has an Internet connec- tion Rthe Android Auto™ app is installed on the mobile phone Rdata sharing must be approved Transmitted vehicle data when using Android Auto™ When using Android Auto™, specific vehicle data is transmitted to the mobile phone. This makes it possible to use selected mobile phone services efficiently. The mobile phone does not have active access to vehicle data. The following system information is trans- mitted: Rsmart Media-System software status Rsystem ID (anonymous) This data is transmitted in order to optimise communication between the vehicle and mobile phone. A random vehicle code is generated for this purpose and in order to assign multiple vehi- cles to the mobile phone. This code is not related to the vehicle identification number (VIN) and is deleted if the smart Media-Sys- tem is reset. The following driving status data is trans- mitted: Rgear position engaged Rinstrument cluster day/night mode This data is transmitted in order to adapt the content displayed to the driving situation. GPS data such as coordinates, speed and compass direction is transmitted. This data is transmitted only when navigation is active in order to improve navigation (e.g. when driving through a tunnel). Setting up a connection X Activate Android Auto™ on the mobile phone (see manufacturer's operating instructions). X Connect a mobile phone with a connecting cable to the USB socket in the centre con- sole. X Select Yes. Android Auto™ starts in the smart Media- System display. Calling up Android Auto™ X Tap on the home page of the smart Media-System. Android Auto™ starts in the smart Media- System display. Activating Android Auto™ voice-operated control When Android Auto™ is activated, the system can be operated with voice control. X Press and hold the button on the mul- tifunction steering wheel for approx- imately three seconds. A tone sounds. Disconnecting Android Auto™ X Disconnect the USB connection between the mobile phone and the smart Media- System. 130 Using a mobile phone

Using the smart Media-System.

Using voice control for the mobile

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 140 · Applies to: 453

phone Useful information The voice control of the connected mobile phone can be used (see manufacturer's oper- ating instructions). Not all voice control services are supported by the smart Media- System. The requirement for voice control of the mobile phone is that Android Auto™ or Mir- rorLink® are not active. Activating voice control for the mobile phone X Connect the mobile phone with the smart Media-System via Bluetooth®. X Press and hold the button on the steering wheel. The symbol appears in the display. Voice control for the mobile phone is active. Further settings Setting the volume X Select Settings > Sound levels. X Set the volume of the hands-free system and the ringtone. Activating voicemail X Select Voice mail. X Enter the voicemail phone number on the keypad. X Select Done. Voicemail is activated and the voicemail number is dialled. Configuring voicemail X Select Settings > Voice mail configura‐ tion. Updating the phone book A Bluetooth® connection must be present. X Select Phone book > W > Update phone data. Updating the call log X Select Call logs > W > Update phone data. Adding a contact to favourites X Select Phone > Phonebook. X Select the contact from the list. X Select W > Add to Favourites. X Dial a phone number. Connecting and operating external data storage media Useful information The following external data storage media can be connected: RUSB memory stick (USB 2.0 or 3.0 with max. 64 GB) or iPod™ RSD or SDHC card (max. 64 GB) RExternal audio equipment (AUX connec- tion) RBluetooth® devices such as mobile phones The following formats are supported: RMP3 files RWMA files RACC formats (.AAC, .M4A, .M4B, .M4P, .M4V, .M4R, .MP4 and .3GP) ROGG Vorbis (.OGG, .OGA) RPCM 16 bit (.WAV, .PCM) A data storage medium may contain no more than eight directory levels. The smart Media-System only recognises the first partition of a data storage medium. The partition must be formatted as FAT or FAT32. Connecting and operating external data storage media 131

Using the smart Media-System. Z

Connecting external data storage

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 141 · Applies to: 453

media

Connecting a USB memory stick

X Insert a USB memory stick in the port on

the centre console.

Playback starts automatically.

Connecting an SD card

X Insert an SD card into the SD card slot in

the centre console.

Playback starts automatically.

Connecting a Bluetooth® device

X Authorise and connect a Bluetooth® device,

such as a Bluetooth®-capable mobile

phone.

Operating external data storage media

Selecting connected external data stor-

age media

X Select Menu > Multimedia > Media .

X Select connected medium.

Controlling playback from a USB memory

stick or SD card

Selects the previous track

; Selects the next track

= Stops and continues playback

? Switches track repeat on

A Switches random playback on

B Calls up the context menu

C Displays the playlist

D Selects a new track based on categories,

e.g. album, genre, folder

E Resumes playback at any point in the

track

Controlling playback from a Bluetooth®

device

Selects a new track ; Selects the previous track = Stops playback ? Selects the next track A Displays the playlist B Calls up the context menu Selecting a different device X Select W > Change source. Connecting another authorised Blue- tooth® device X Select W > Find new device. Enabling and disabling random playback X To enable: select W > Enable shuffle. X To disable: select W > Disable shuffle. Displaying details of tracks on a USB memory stick or SD card X Select W > Song details. 132 Connecting and operating external data storage media

Using the smart Media-System.

Selecting a track from current playlist

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 142 · Applies to: 453

X Select New selection > Folders. The current playlist is displayed. X Select Find. A keyboard is shown. X Enter the name or part of the name of the track you are looking for. Selecting a track from categories X Select New selection. X Select a category for playback. Switching album cover display on and off The album cover must be saved in the audio file. X Select Multimedia > Settings > Media > Display album cover. Viewing images Useful information Images that have been saved to an SD card or USB memory stick can be viewed in the smart Media-System. The following file formats can be displayed: R.JPG R.GIF R.PNG R.BMP Image playback Starting image playback X Insert an SD card or USB memory stick into the corresponding port. X Select Multimedia > Pictures. X Select USB or SD as the media source. X Select a folder. X Select an image. Switching between images X Swipe left or right. Specifying a new selection of images X Select New selection. Setting image playback Switching from normal to thumbnail view X Select Thumbnails. Switching from thumbnail to normal view X Select an image. Displaying in full screen mode X Select W > Full screen. Activating the controls in full screen mode X Tap the touchscreen. Switching from full screen mode to nor- mal view X Select W > Normal view. Enlarging the image X Select W > Zoom in. Showing images as a slide show X Select W > Slide show. Setting the display duration X Select W > Picture settings > Slide show delay. X Set the desired time using the controls. Setting default view for image playback X Select W > Image settings > Default view. X Select Normal view or Full screen. Viewing images 133

Using the smart Media-System. Z

Video playback

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 143 · Applies to: 453

Video playback Starting video playback X Insert an SD card or connect a USB stick. X Select Multimedia > Video. X Select USB or SD. X Select a folder or video. All videos in a folder are played one after the other. i The size of the video file may have an impact on the performance of the system. Therefore, only playback videos with a length of up to five minutes. Selecting the next or previous video X Select D or C. Stopping and continuing playback X Select Ë. Playing a new video X Select New selection. X Select a new video. Setting the video view Playing videos in full screen mode X Select Full screen. Setting the default view for video play- back X Select W > Video settings. X Select Normal view or Full screen. Using TomTom Services Please note The smart Media-System uses a mobile phone connection for data connection. Please take note of the following information when using data services: RThe mobile connectivity and built-in SIM card for this vehicle can only be used for data services. These are offered by certain third parties as well as Daimler AG. Usage occurs via the smart Media-System in the vehicle. The use of data services requires the conclusion of separate agreements between the vehicle user and the respec- tive provider. Voice service usage is not permitted. As such, the SIM card must be permanently installed in the condition in which it was delivered. RThe mobile communications connectivity and the SIM card may only be used respon- sibly in accordance with the applicable laws and other legal requirements of the corresponding countries. Provided that this is within the power of the vehicle user. RUpgrading, reproduction, reverse assem- bly and disassembly of the SIM card are not permitted. Statutory authority remains unaffected. Failure to follow the above instructions can, in some cases, lead to temporary or perma- nent deactivation of the mobile connection and the SIM card. This depends on the severity of non-observance. The measure described here contributes in particular to the protection of Daimler AG and its contrac- tual partners from negative legal conse- quences due to non-observance. The availa- bility of mobile connectivity in individual countries depends on the existence of corre- sponding mobile service agreements with local mobile network providers. Availability can therefore change from time to time. The maximum period of validity for the mobile connectivity is 15 years from the time of installation in the vehicle. Useful information In the TomTom Services menu, traffic infor- mation and other TomTom Services can be called up and managed. 134 Using TomTom Services

Using the smart Media-System.

TomTom Live Services are available for a

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 144 · Applies to: 453

subscription fee. The following TomTom Services come pre-installed and, following activation, can be used free of charge for a period of three years: RHD Traffic RRadar cameras (not available in all coun- tries) RWeather RTomTom Places More information on services http://www.tomtom.com/services. More information on availability in specific countries: http://smart.com/connect TomTom Services can also be called up and managed in the Services menu. In the main menu, select Services > TomTom Services. i If you have subscribed to the "TomTom Traffic" service and this is available, the "Traffic info" menu will be called "TomTom Traffic". Activating TomTom Services TomTom Services must be activated in the smart Media-System before using them for the first time. If TomTom Services are not yet activated, a corresponding button will be displayed in the main menu and in the Serv‐ ices menu. To activate TomTom Services for the first time, observe the following requirements: Ran SD card with map data is inserted into the SD card slot Ra valid vehicle position is available on the map Ra mobile phone network is available X Select Services > Activate My Services. X Confirm the display messages with Yes. After a short while, TomTom Services are available. X Select Services > TomTom Services. The TomTom Services installed on the device are displayed. X Select the desired TomTom service. A display message appears. TomTom Serv- ices are activated. Starting TomTom Services X Select Navigation > TomTom Services. Checking subscription status for Tom- Tom Services The services available on the device and their subscription status may be checked at any time. X Select Services > TomTom Services > My services. The services available on the device and their subscription status will be shown. Subscription to a service can be extended via http://www.tomtom.com, subject to a fee. This requires registration at http:// tomtom.com/forsmart. X Remove the SD card from the vehicle and insert it into a computer. Further information: http://tomtom.com/ forsmart. Downloading updates and POIs If available, map and software updates as well as points of interest may be downloaded via http://www.tomtom.com. This requires registration at http://tomtom.com/forsmart. X Remove the SD card from the vehicle and insert it into a computer. Further information: http://tomtom.com/ forsmart. Calling up Applications manager Information on smartphone screen applica- tions and smartphone voice-operated con- trol can be called up with the Applications manager. X Select Services > Settings > Applica‐ tions manager. Calling up the connectivity manager The connectivity manager allows you to manage the devices connected to the smart Media-System. Using TomTom Services 135

Using the smart Media-System. Z

X Select Services > Settings > Connectiv‐

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 145 · Applies to: 453

ity manager. Managing data sharing Please note If data sharing is approved, smartphone screen applications, for example Android Auto™, smartphone voice-operated control and the online charging station search are activated alongside TomTom Services. Enabling or disabling data sharing If data sharing has not been enabled before- hand, a corresponding message is shown when the smart Media-System is started up. Data sharing can be enabled or disabled at any time. X Select Services > Settings > Data shar‐ ing. X Select one of the following settings: RYes Enable data sharing RNo Disable data sharing. Displaying additional information X Select Services > Settings > Data sharing

About. Displaying text in another language X Select Services > Settings > Data sharing Language. Using the navigation system Starting the navigation system Please note G WARNING If you operate information and communi- cation equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle paying atten- tion to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. The navigation system does not provide information on stop signs, right of way signs, traffic regulations or road safety regula- tions. The traffic regulations always take prece- dence over navigation announcements. Observe the legal stipulations and traffic regulations of the country you are driving in when in navigation mode. Selecting the navigation system X Select Menu > Navigation. The following functions can be carried out: Rsearching for a destination Rplanning a route Rdisplaying a map Rcalling up TomTom Services Rchanging navigation settings Installing map data G WARNING SD cards are small parts. They can be swal- lowed and cause choking. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Keep the SD card out of the reach of chil- dren. If a SD card is swallowed, seek med- ical attention immediately. ! To prevent damage to data, only use the SD card provided for the data in the Media- System or for updating map and systems files. X Insert an SD card into the SD card slot in the centre console. X Switch on the device. The map data is read by the navigation system. 136 Using the navigation system

Using the smart Media-System.

Removing an SD card

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 146 · Applies to: 453

X Select Menu > System > Remove SD-card. X Confirm the display message with Yes. X Press the SD card. X Remove the SD card from the slot. Updating map data Regular updates will be offered for the map data. The first update can be downloaded for free in the web portal within 90 days of vehi- cle activation. This requires registration at http://tomtom.com/forsmart. Further infor- mation is available from any smart centre. X Remove the SD card from the vehicle and insert it into a computer. X Install update software on the computer. X Run the map update assistant. i As well as updates, the latest software for the Media-System can be downloaded and Premium Voices by TomTom can be pur- chased. Entering and managing destinations Entering a destination by address X When using the navigation system for the first time, enter the country. X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Address. X If desired, change the country using the flag symbol. X Enter the town or postcode. X Select the destination from the list. X Select the street. X Select the house number. X Confirm with Done. Searching for a car park near the desti- nation address This function can be called up when entering the destination. X Select W > Nearby car park. A list of car parks near the current desti- nation appears. Displaying information about the desti- nation address This function can be called up when entering the destination. X Select W > Show info. Entering a destination using the map A location on the map can be selected as the destination. X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Point on map. X Align the map view with the destination. X Tap the destination point on the display. The symbol selected is highlighted in blue. X Tap on the symbol to confirm. Entering a destination using the voice control system X Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. A tone sounds. X Say the command "Enter address". X When prompted by the voice control sys- tem, say the destination address, includ- ing street name, house number and city. X Say the voice command "Yes" or, if several possible destinations are displayed, say the number. Selecting a destination from the list of previous destinations X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Recent destinations. X Select the destination. Entering a destination using geo-coor- dinates X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Lati‐ tude Longitude. X Enter the longitude and latitude. Using the navigation system 137

Using the smart Media-System. Z

Setting a home location

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 147 · Applies to: 453

X Select Navigation > Settings > Set home location. X Enter a home address. Setting home as a destination X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Home. Selecting a saved location as a destina- tion At least one destination must be stored for this function. X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Saved locations. X Select the destination. Managing saved locations X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage saved locations. Entering a charging station as a desti- nation X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Charg‐ ing stations. The following list of locations appears in which a charging station can be searched for: RNear my location RAlong route RNear destination RNear Home RIn city X Select the location for the charging station search. A list of the corresponding charging sta- tions appears. There is an automatic check whether a charging point is free on these charging stations. The check may take several minutes. When the check is fin- ished, a message appears. If a charging station has a charging point which is not being used, it will be marked green. If no charging point is free, or no information is available, the charging station is marked grey. Charging stations from the map data which cannot be checked are not marked. A maximum of 24 charging stations can be checked. i Five minutes after the check, the marking automatically changes from green to grey. X Select a charging station. Entering a point of interest POIs such as museums, restaurants or car parks near a location are displayed on the map. X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Point of interest. The following list of surrounding areas appears. A POI can be searched for in these areas: RNear my location RAlong route RNear destination RNear Home RIn city X Select the surrounding area in which to search for a POI. The following list of categories for POIs appears: Rlist of categories for POIs: e.g. charging station or restaurant RPOI name search RPOI search within a category X Select the category for the search. X Select a POI. i If the charging station category is selec- ted, only charging stations from the map data are searched. Charging stations that can be checked for charging point availa- bility are not taken into account. Managing POIs Adding a POI category X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Add POI category. X Enter the name and symbol for the new POI category. Deleting a POI category X Delete Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Delete POI category. X Select the category to be deleted. 138 Using the navigation system

Using the smart Media-System.

Adding POIs

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 148 · Applies to: 453

X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Add POI. If no POI categories have been defined yet, a prompt appears to enter a POI category. X Select the category for the POI. X Enter your POI. Having POIs displayed on map This function enables the display of person- alised POIs on the map. X Select Navigation > Settings > Show POI on map. Deleting POIs X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Delete POI. X Select a POI category. X Select the POI to be deleted. Editing POIs X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Edit POI. X Select a POI category. X Customise the POI properties. Setting alerts for a nearby POI X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Warning when near POI. X Select a POI category. X Set the distance at which the message should appear. X Set the type of alert issued. Entering a destination via the TomTom LIVE service "TomTom Places" POIs from the "TomTom Places" online data- base are available using the "TomTom Pla- ces" function. X Select Navigation > Drive to... > TomTom Places. A list of search criteria appears which can be used to search for a POI. X Select the search criterion. X Enter a search term. If a large number of search results are available, 20 additional search results can be downloaded. Changing the route Useful information Once the destination has been selected, the navigation system calculates the route to the destination. The following options are avail- able for adjusting route guidance: Rcalculate alternative routes Radjust routes calculated by the navigation system Rplan routes in advance and travel via spe- cific way points Radjust settings for calculating routes Once the route is calculated, a route sum- mary is shown. By default, the quickest route will be calculated for route planning, taking into account IQ Routes™. Traffic information is taken into account when calculating the route. Depending on the remaining range, sections of the route receive the following colours: Rgreen: remaining range is expected to be sufficient for the route. Rorange: this route may or may not be able to be completed depending on the driving style and the influence of external factors. Rred: remaining range is not expected to be sufficient for the route. The "route overview" function allows you to set whether the summary of a calculated route is automatically faded out from the display after ten seconds. If the route is not confirmed with Done, the view switches after approximately ten sec- onds automatically to the map view. Displaying a planned route Calculating the route X Enter a destination. X Select Done. The route is displayed. If the remaining range is not expected to be sufficient to reach the destination, a prompt will appear asking whether a charging station should be added to the route. Using the navigation system 139

Using the smart Media-System. Z

Displaying the route details

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 149 · Applies to: 453

X Select W > Route details. X Select one of the following functions: RShow instructions An overview of the route with directions appears. RShow map of route The route appears on a map. RShow destination The destination for the route appears. By pressing W, it is possible to search for a car park near the destination or add the location to the saved locations. RShow traffic on route Traffic disruptions along the route are shown. RSummary A summary of the route details appears. Saving a planned route X Select W > Save Itinerary . Changing the route Cancelling the route X Select Navigation > Change route > Can‐ cel route. When a new destination is entered, route guidance can be resumed again. Calculating an alternative route X Select Navigation > Change route > Cal‐ culate alternative. A new route is calculated and displayed that takes you on different roads. X Select the alternative route or a previous one. Route guidance via way point The route can be adjusted by entering up to four way points. X Select Navigation > Change route > Travel via. If a way point has already been entered, a list of the saved way points will be dis- played. X Select Add. X Select a new way point from Address, Recent destinations, Saved locations, TomTom Places or Point of interest. The new way point is added. Avoiding road blocks The route can be changed if a section of road along the route is blocked or there is a traffic jam. X Select Navigation > Change route > Avoid roadblock. X Select the length of the route that needs to be avoided. Avoiding specific roads The route is calculated to avoid specific roads. X Select Navigation > Change route > Avoid part of route. A list of the roads on the route is displayed. X Select the street that you wish to avoid. Taking traffic disruptions into account The route is recalculated based on current traffic information. Traffic information is not available in all countries and regions. X Select Navigation > Change route > Mini‐ mise delays. An overview of the traffic disruptions along the route will be shown. X Select the traffic disruption you wish to avoid. Planning a route in advance Adding a route X Select Navigation > Itineraries. X Select Add. X Select the starting point of the route. X Enter the route destination. X Enter at least one way point for the route. 140 Using the navigation system

Using the smart Media-System.

X Enter the route name.

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 150 · Applies to: 453

X Confirm with Done. Starting navigation using a saved route X Select Navigation > Itineraries. X Select the desired route. X Select W > Start. Setting route planning Selecting route types X Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Route types. X Select one of the following settings: RAsk for every route RAlways plan the fastest route RAlways plan eco routes RAlways avoid motorways RAlways plan the shortest route Selecting the setting for toll roads X Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Toll roads. X Select one of the following settings: RAsk for toll roads on route RAlways avoid toll roads RDo not avoid toll roads Selecting the setting for ferry connections X Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Ferry connections. X Select one of the following settings: RAsk for ferries on my route RAlways avoid ferries RDo not avoid ferries i Route planning treats the Eurotunnel as a ferry connection. Selecting the setting for unpaved roads X Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Unpaved roads. X Select one of the following settings: RAsk for unpaved roads on my route RAlways avoid unpaved roads Selecting the setting for carpool lanes Carpool lanes are lanes which can only be used by vehicles with at least two occupants. X Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Carpool lane settings. X Select one of the following settings: RAsk for carpool lanes on my route RAlways avoid carpool lanes RNever avoid carpool lanes Using information during route guid- ance Useful information Navigation announcements provide guid- ance during the journey without distracting you from traffic conditions. In addition, the display shows information about the route. Switching navigation announcements on and off X Tap on the area of the next navigation manoeuvre during route guidance. X Select Turn on voice guidance or Turn off voice guidance. Information such as traffic reports and warnings will be played even if the naviga- tion announcements have been deactivated. During route guidance, traffic information can be shown for the route ahead. The fol- lowing traffic information can be received: RTraffic announcements (RDS/TMC) RHD Traffic (a TomTom Live service) i HD Traffic Information takes precedence. Live services are not available in all coun- tries and regions. Further information: http://tomtom.com/services Using the navigation system 141

Using the smart Media-System. Z

Tracking navigation on the display

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 151 · Applies to: 453

Zoom in and out of the map view

; Maximum permitted speed

= Name of the next main road or informa-

tion about the next street sign

? Traffic information

A Route information

Warning for remaining range to destina-

tion

B Compass and symbol for two or three-

dimensional map display

C Context menu

D Next navigation manoeuvre with dis-

tance and symbol for volume adjustment

E Information about current radio or audio

equipment

X Tap on an area or on a symbol in the map

display:

RMap: to switch to the overview map

R:: to zoom in and out of the map view

R?: to show traffic reports on the route

RA: to display the route details

RB: to switch between two or three-dimen-

sional map display

RC: to open the context menu

RD: to repeat the navigation message,

change the volume of navigation

announcements or switch off

RE: to switch to the corresponding radio,

multimedia or telephone menu

The navigation system zooms in on the map

view as the vehicle approaches a junction.

This makes it possible to follow turning

manoeuvres more accurately.

Shortly before navigating a motorway junc-

tion or exit, the display will show a three-

dimensional representation of the lanes and

the exit. Lane Keeping Assist is not available

for all junctions in all countries.

Traffic information details

Overall delay on route ; Traffic disruption (packed snow) = Traffic disruption (rain) ? Traffic disruption (traffic jam) A Current location and distance to next traffic disruption During route guidance, traffic information is shown for the route ahead. When there are a number of traffic disruptions in quick suc- cession, only the very next disruption on the route will be displayed. Traffic information is not available in all countries and regions. Colour Meaning Grey Unknown or unexplained situa- tion Orange Slow-moving traffic Red Traffic jam Dark red Standstill or road blocked Calling up more detailed information about the traffic problems X Tap on the display for traffic information during route guidance. Scrolling through the traffic reports X Tap on the message on the touchscreen and swipe left or right. 142 Using the navigation system

Using the smart Media-System.

Displaying the overview map

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 152 · Applies to: 453

Useful information With the "View map" function, the display shows a slidable, two-dimensional overview map. The map shows your current position, as well as a number of other elements, such as favourites. Displaying a map X Select Navigation > View map. A map of the surrounding area will be shown. X To search: select W > Find. Controlling the map view Moving the map X Tap on the centre of the touchscreen. X Swipe in the desired direction. The map will then move in the respective direction. Zooming in on the map X Place two fingers slightly apart in the middle of the touchscreen. X Move your fingers away from each other. Reducing the scale of the map X Place two fingers at a greater distance apart on the screen. Do not place your fin- gers at the very top area or very bottom area of the display. X Pull your fingers towards each other. Displaying the reachability map If no route is planned, a reachability map can be displayed in order to roughly gauge the range with the current charge status. X Select Navigation > View map. X Select W > View reachability map. Showing and hiding additional informa- tion on the map X Select Navigation > View map. X Select W > Change map information. X Select one of the following pieces of infor- mation: RTraffic information RNames RPoints of interest (POIs) RSatellite images RCoordinates Using TomTom Services with the navi- gation system Displaying traffic information along the route X Tap on the area of traffic information dur- ing route guidance. X Swipe left or right to switch between traf- fic information. Adjusting the route according to traffic disruptions X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > Traffic > Minimise delays. A faster route that had been previously rejected or route which may not have been taken into account due to the Never change my route setting for the traffic information is selected. Displaying traffic disruptions on the overview map X Select W > View map during route guid- ance. Traffic disruptions are displayed as sym- bols on the overview map. Large area traf- fic disruptions such as rain, fog or snow are displayed with several symbols. X To view detailed information, tap on a traf- fic disruption symbol. The following symbols are used: Symbol Meaning Traffic jam Road blocked Traffic disruption Construction site Using the navigation system 143

Using the smart Media-System. Z

Symbol

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 153 · Applies to: 453

Meaning One or more lanes blocked Accident Traffic disruption avoided using the traffic information Fog Wind Snow Black ice Rain i Large area traffic disruptions such as rain, fog or snow are displayed on the overview map with several symbols. Viewing traffic information for the route to work X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > Traffic > Traffic info. for route to work. X Select one of the following settings: RHome to work RWork to home RChange the home to work route Selecting the settings for traffic infor- mation X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > Traffic > Traffic info. settings. X Select one of the following settings: RAlways change to this route If a faster route has been calculated due to a traffic report, the navigation system automatically changes the route. RRequest confirmation for route If a faster route has been calculated due to a traffic report, the navigation system will ask which route should be used. RNever change my route The navigation system will not change the route, even if a traffic announcement has been made. Setting the navigation system Setting the voice The voice used for navigation messages can be changed. It is possible to choose between computer-generated voices or voices recor- ded by professionals. For voices that have been recorded by professionals, only basic navigation messages will be spoken. X Select System > Sound > Voice. X Select the voice for playback. X To listen to the voice, select Test. Setting the voice output The read-aloud function is only available in a computer-generated voice. X Select System > Sound > Voice output settings. X Select one of the following settings: RRead early warning instructions RRead aloud motorway lane instruc‐ tions RRead aloud traffic info when navi‐ gating RRead aloud foreign street names RRead aloud road numbers RRead aloud street names RRead aloud weather information RRead aloud POI warnings RRead aloud warnings RRead aloud signposts Changing the map X Select Navigation > Settings > Switch map. X Select the desired map. 144 Using the navigation system

Using the smart Media-System.

Changing the map colours

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 154 · Applies to: 453

X Select Navigation > Settings > Change map colours. X Press , or . to select the desired display. Changing the E-vehicle settings X Select Navigation > Settings > E-vehicle settings. The following functions can be called up: Rdeactivating or activating the battery warning When the charge status of the high- voltage battery has reached 20% and the battery warning is activated, a display message appears. Rshowing or hiding charging stations on the map Rmanaging charging stations Rselecting the charging cable The settings for both the type of charging and charging cable are used by the naviga- tion system to refine the selection of avail- able charging stations. During navigation, the following options can be selected via the W context menu: Rsearch for type of charging Rsearch for electricity provider Rdisplay all charging stations A display message appears if there is some incompatibility between the defined set- tings and a selected charging station. Setting safety warnings X Select System > Safety warnings. X Select the desired settings: RSuggest driving breaks RWarn when driving near schools RWarn when driving faster than allowed RWarn when driving faster than a set speed X Select Resume. X Select a warning tone for the respective safety warning. For the "Warn when driving faster than a set speed" function, the speed above which the warning tone should sound must be entered. Setting the units of measurement for dis- tance All units of measurement for distance in the navigation system can be changed. The units of measurement for distance of other dis- plays are not changed, such as distance dis- plays for the eco score or the on-board com- puter. X Select System > Set units > Distance units. X Select one of the following settings: RKilometres RMiles Setting the units for GPS coordinates X Select System > Set units > GPS coordi‐ nate display. X Select one of the following settings: RDegrees (d°) RDegrees, Minutes (d° m.m') RDegrees, Minutes, Seconds (d° m' s'') Using the navigation system 145

Using the smart Media-System. Z

Online access to the vehicle

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 155 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING If you operate information and communi- cation equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle paying atten- tion to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. G WARNING If you use mobile information systems and communications devices while driving, you will be distracted from traffic condi- tions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices when the vehi- cle is stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the coun- try in which you are currently driving. You can use "smart control" to access remote query and to configure your vehicle remotely. It can be accessed from computers and smartphones. The Internet address is available from any smart centre. It is also possible to call up "smart control" via the smart website. Access to "smart control" is free of charge for the first three years commencing from hand- over of the new vehicle, subject to the avail- ability of the service. Thereafter you can continue to subscribe to use the "smart con- trol" service. The availability and features of "smart con- trol" may vary from country to country. Requirements for the use of "smart control": RRegistration on the "smart portal" Internet page via smart.com/portal. A valid e-mail address or mobile phone number is necessary for registration and the terms of use must be accepted. RThe vehicle must be linked with a personal "smart portal" account at a smart centre. Verification and presentation of the vehi- cle registration document are required to link the vehicle. The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also required. RThe desired functions must be activated after linking the vehicle. For activation, the "smart control" terms of use for both the remote query and remote configuration must be accepted via the "smart portal". The portal address is sup- plied by the smart centre. RThe vehicle must be connected to the Internet. Connection is made possible via the mobile communications module integrated in the vehicle. Once these requirements are fulfilled, the following functions, for example, may be used: RCalling up the current locking status of the vehicle. RCalling up information on the distance before the next recommended service or if a service is already due. RCalling up the current vehicle position in the range of approx. 1.5 km around the vehicle. During the charging process, additional dis- plays can be called up such as the predicted time until charging is completed or the charging capacity. If there is a delay in the synchronisation of data via the mobile phone network, the dis- plays in the vehicle and at "smart control" may temporarily differ from each other. Further information on "smart control" is available at any smart centre and via www.smart.com/smartcontrol. Using smart "ready to" services Useful information smart "ready to" services are only available in certain countries. 146 Using smart "ready to" services

Using online offerings.

The functions are enabled via a communica-

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 156 · Applies to: 453

tion module and the smart "ready to" app. Information as well as the Internet addresses for the smart "ready to" services are availa- ble at any smart centre. i If you are already using a smart "ready to" service, additional services can be activated with your user details in the usual web portal or via the app. The communication module and activation are required in order to use the smart "ready to" services: RRegister on the "ready to" web portal. A valid e-mail address and the vehicle identification number (VIN) are necessary for registration, and the conditions of use must be accepted. RInstall the "ready to" app on your smart- phone and create a user account. Using the Key Card Holder Key Card Holder : is fitted in the glove com- partment and is intended for the storage and inventory of the vehicle key and up to two cards (e.g. fuel card, parking card or car wash card). The inventory is available within certain smart "ready to" services. For an inventory, the key and/or the cards must be equipped with an RFID tag. Using smart "ready to" services 147

Using online offerings. Z

Stowing small objects

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 157 · Applies to: 453

Please note G WARNING If you stow objects in the vehicle interior in an unsuitable way, they could slip or be thrown around and thus hit vehicle occu- pants. Additionally, the cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot restrain the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, especially in the event of braking or sudden changes in direction. RAlways stow objects so they cannot be thrown around in these or similar situa- tions. RAlways ensure that objects do not pro- trude over the top of stowage compart- ments or ruffled pockets. RAll closable stowage compartments should be closed before beginning your journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile objects or objects which are too large behind the last bench seat or under the passenger seats. G WARNING The cup holder cannot secure a drinks con- tainer in place during a journey. If you use a cup holder during a journey, the drinks container could be flung around and liquid could be spilt. Vehicle occupants could come into contact with the liquid and, in particular, be scalded by hot liquid. You could be distracted from the traffic situa- tion and lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. Only place containers of a suit- able size in the cup holder. Seal the con- tainer, in particular when it contains hot liquid. ! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. Using the compartments X To stow objects, use suitable stowage spaces. The following stowage spaces are availa- ble: R: Stowage compartments in the doors R; Cup holder in the front centre console R= Glove compartment R? Stowage net in the front-passenger footwell RA Sliding drawer in the centre console RBracket on the seat for a tablet RVelcro strip on the front passenger seat for stowing a handbag RCup holder in the rear centre console with a recess for storing a mobile phone Rreadyspace seats: cargo box with cup holders in the rear compartment RParcel shelf 148 Stowing small objects

Loading and stowing.

Locking/unlocking the glove compart-

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 158 · Applies to: 453

ment

X Insert the key into the lock.

X To lock: turn the key to position 2.

X To unlock: turn the key to position 1.

Using the rear cup holders (readyspace

seats)

In conjunction with readyspace seats, two

cup holders : and ; are available for use in

the rear.

X Open the stowage compartment in order to

use cup holder ;.

Cup holder ; can be removed. The maxi-

mum load for the stowage compartment is

1 kg.

Removing and fitting the rear shelf

Removing the rear shelf

! The maximum load which may be placed

on the parcel shelf is 3 kg.

Straps ; Rear shelf X Detach the straps from the tailgate. X Fold down the rear shelf. X Pull the rear shelf out to the rear. Fitting the rear shelf X Place the rear shelf on the guide rails on the left and right. X Push the rear shelf forwards until it engages. X Fold the rear shelf upwards. X Attach straps to the tailgate. Stowing luggage and large objects Please note G WARNING If you stow objects in the vehicle interior in an unsuitable way, they could slip or be thrown around and thus hit vehicle occu- pants. Additionally, the cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot restrain the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, especially in the event of braking or sudden changes in direction. RAlways stow objects so they cannot be thrown around in these or similar situa- tions. RAlways ensure that objects do not pro- trude over the top of stowage compart- ments or ruffled pockets. Stowing luggage and large objects 149

Loading and stowing. Z

RAll closable stowage compartments

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 159 · Applies to: 453

should be closed before beginning your journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile objects or objects which are too large behind the last bench seat or under the passenger seats. The handling characteristics of a laden vehi- cle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. Observe the following loading guidelines when loading and transporting luggage and loads: Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occu- pants) Rthe load compartment is the preferred place to stow objects Rstow heavy loads as far forwards and as low down in the load compartment as pos- sible Rthe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests Ralways place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked in place. Ralways transport the load behind unoccu- pied seats if possible Rsecure the load and luggage suitably Opening the boot ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. X Press the % button on the key. X Press button :. X Fold the tailgate up. Closing the boot X Pull the tailgate down and close. X Press the & button on the key. The vehicle is locked. Using lashing eyelets To prevent damage, observe the following: RSecure the load using lashing eyelets :. RDistribute the load on the lashing eyelets evenly. RDo not use elastic straps or nets. RPad any sharp edges. 150 Using lashing eyelets

Loading and stowing.

Enlarging the load compartment

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 160 · Applies to: 453

Folding the rear seat backrest forward G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat back- rest. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could result in additional injury. RObjects or loads in the boot/luggage compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. This poses an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged before every trip. X Push the head restraints all the way in. X Pull right or left loop : on the seat back- rest in the direction of the arrow. X Fold down the seat backrest fully. Folding back the rear seat backrests ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam- aged. X Fold back the left or right seat backrest until it engages. Red lock status indicator : on the loop must no longer be visible. Folding the front-passenger seat backrest forwards Folding down the front-passenger seat backrest (using the lever) Seat with a lever X Lift lever ; and slide the front passenger seat to its rearmost position. X Pull lever : forwards. X Fold the seat backrest forwards at the same time. Enlarging the load compartment 151

Loading and stowing. Z

Folding down the front-passenger seat

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 161 · Applies to: 453

backrest (using the handwheel) Seat with a handwheel X Turn handwheel : forward. Folding back the front-passenger seat backrest Please note G WARNING If the seat backrest is not engaged, it may fold forwards, e.g. during braking or in the event of an accident. RAs a result, a backrest which is not engaged would press you into the seat belt. The seat belt cannot perform its intended protective function and could additionally cause injury. RThe backrest cannot restrain objects or loads in the boot. This poses an increased risk of injury. Before every journey, make sure that the backrest is engaged as described. Folding back the front-passenger seat backrest (using the lever) X Pull lever :. X Push the seat backrest back at the same time until it engages. Folding back the front-passenger seat backrest (using the handwheel) X Turn handwheel : backwards. Adjusting the angle of the rear seat backrests (cargo position) X Release right-hand or left-hand seat backrest ;. X Fold right-hand or left-hand seat back- rest ; slightly forwards. X Fold seat backrest catch : forwards. X Fold right-hand or left-hand seat back- rest ; back to seat backrest catch : until it engages. Folding seat cushions forwards (ready- space seats) G WARNING If you rotate the rear seat cushion when the cargo box is removed, you or other vehicle occupants could be caught in the seat mechanism. There is a risk of injury. Only rotate the seat cushion if the cargo box is fitted. Ensure that no parts of the body are in the immediate vicinity of mov- ing parts. ! Do not fold the rear seat backrests for- wards if the rear seat cushions have been rotated. Otherwise, the rear seat backrests may be damaged. 152 Enlarging the load compartment

Loading and stowing.

X Pull loop : and fold the seat cushion for-

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 162 · Applies to: 453

wards. Removing the cargo box (readyspace seats) X Release the cargo box using handle :. X Using both hands, reach into the handle recesses at the front and behind and push the cargo box forwards and up at a slight angle. X Remove the cargo box. Removing/fitting the charging cable bag Removing the charging cable bag X Turn both buttons : to the left. The buttons are released from the anchor- age. X Fold the charging cable bag to the left. The Velcro fasteners under the charging cable bag are detached. X Remove snap hook ;. Installing the charging cable bag X Place the charging cable bag with its side resting on the engine compartment cover and then position it on the side trim. X Position the charging cable bag in a ver- tical position. Take hold of the Velcro fasteners beneath the charging cable bag. X Push both buttons : into the anchorage and turn them to the right. X Secure snap hook ;. Removing/fitting the charging cable bag 153

Loading and stowing. Z

Useful information

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 163 · Applies to: 453

The engine compartment in the smart is located at the rear, below the boot. Service fluid reservoirs are located under the service cover at the front. When working on the vehicle, always comply with all safety regulations. Always have work in the engine compartment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Removing/fitting the subwoofer Removing the subwoofer X Release quick-release fastener : in the direction of the arrow. X Reach into the recess on the quick-release fastener. X Detach, tilt and pull the subwoofer to the right. X Pull out the connector. Fitting the subwoofer X Insert the connector. X Place the subwoofer at the base of the side trim. X Turn quick-release fastener : upwards. X Press the bracket into the recess in side trim ;. X Turn quick-release fastener : to the right. Opening and closing the service cover Please note G WARNING If the service cover is not locked, it may come loose during driving and block your view or endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, make sure that the service cover is locked before driving off. G WARNING If the windscreen wipers start to move when the service cover is open, you could become caught up in the wiper rods. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before you open the ser- vice cover. ! To ensure unhindered air intake, com- pletely remove any dirt or snow from the ventilation slots above the service cover. The vehicle must be secured against rolling away. On vehicles with a lockable service cover, the service cover must be unlocked before it is opened. 154 Opening and closing the service cover

Maintenance and care.

Unlocking the service cover

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 164 · Applies to: 453

X Insert the tip of the key into the opening of lock cover :. X Press the key to the right ; to lever up the lock cover. X Remove the lock cover. X Insert the key into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise. Opening the service cover X Pull both levers ; in the direction of the arrow. X Lift service cover = at the front. X Pull service cover = slightly forwards and lift upwards. X Put down service cover =. Closing the service cover X Unhook service cover =. X Slide bars A on the left and right of the service cover under the bars on wing ?. X Press service cover = downwards. X Press both levers ; backwards in the direction of the arrow. Locking the service cover X Insert the key into the lock and turn it to position 1. X Insert lock cover : on the driver's side and snap it into place. Opening and closing the service cover 155

Maintenance and care. Z

Checking service products and topping

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 165 · Applies to: 453

up Please note G WARNING Service product can be poisonous and haz- ardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Observe the instructions on the respective original container when using, storing and disposing off service products. Always store service products in the sealed origi- nal container. Always keep service prod- ucts out of the reach of children. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environ- mentally-responsible manner. Also observe the information in the "Service products" section (Y page 209). Service products include the following: RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindscreen washer fluid RClimate control system refrigerant Service products approved for smart: http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com Checking the coolant and topping up Checking the coolant level X Stop the vehicle on a level surface. X Let the coolant cool down for at least 30 minutes. X Open the service cover. X Check reservoir ; visually. The fluid level must be between the MIN mark and the MAX mark. Topping up the coolant G WARNING The cooling system is pressurised when the drive system is at normal operating temperature. When you open the cap, you could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury. Let the drive system cool down before you open the cap. Wear protective gloves and eye protection when opening. Open the cap slowly to relieve pressure. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con- tact a qualified specialist workshop. If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approx- imately 130 †. The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concen- tration in the engine cooling system should be between 40% and 50% (antifreeze protec- tion down to -37 †). This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -25 †. X Cover cap : of coolant expansion tank ; with a cloth. X Turn the cap slowly one half turn. If nec- essary, allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn the cap further and remove it. X Top up the coolant to the MAX level. X Replace the cap and tighten it as far as it will go. X Close the service cover. i See "Technical data" for information on recommended coolants. 156 Checking service products and topping up

Maintenance and care.

Topping up the washer fluid

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 166 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot components in the front compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that windscreen washer con- centrate is not spilled next to the filler neck. X Open the service cover. X Pull cap : upwards at the tab. X If available, pull the removable nozzle up as far as the stop. X Top up with washer fluid. X If available, push the removable nozzle down and push it inside. X Replace and tightly screw on cap :. X Close the service cover. i See "Technical data" for information on windscreen washer fluid and antifreeze. Checking wheels and tyres G Warning A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive with a flat tyre. Immediately replace the flat tyre with your spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tyres regularly for signs of dam- age and replace any damaged tyres imme- diately. G WARNING Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre traction. The tyre is no longer able to dis- sipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of aquaplaning increa- ses, in particular where speed is not adap- ted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres. Minimum tyre tread depth for: Rsummer tyres: 3 mm RM+S tyres: 4 mm For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally prescribed limit for the mini- mum tyre tread depth is reached. ! If you cannot avoid driving over obsta- cles, e.g. kerbs, do so slowly and at an obtuse angle only. You could otherwise damage the wheel rims and tyres. Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted. The use of spacers or brake dust shields is not permitted. This invalidates the general operating permit for the vehicle. Check the wheels and tyres for damage at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on poorly surfaced roads. Run-in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km. The tyres only attain their max- imum performance after this distance. Vibrations, audible noises and unusual han- dling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side, can indicate damage to wheels or tyres. Checking wheels and tyres 157

Maintenance and care. Z

If you suspect a tyre defect:

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 167 · Applies to: 453

X Reduce vehicle speed. X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible. X Check the wheels and tyres for damage. If you find no signs of damage, have the wheels and tyres checked at a specialist workshop. Changing a wheel Please note G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving charac- teristics if the wheels or tyres have differ- ent dimensions. The wheel brakes or sus- pension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Interchange front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tyres are of the same dimensions. G WARNING Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tyre damage or the tyre bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tyre load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. G WARNING If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension com- ponents may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: Rdesignation Rtype When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rtype ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure monitor, electronic components are loca- ted in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve, since this could dam- age the electronic components. Only have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Position a suitable jack only on the jack- ing points intended for this purpose. Raise the vehicle for a short time only to change the wheel. Make sure the vehicle is on a suitable surface and that no-one is in the vehicle. Secure the vehicle using chocks and apply the parking brake. Interchanging front and rear wheels or tires of differing dimensions can render the gen- eral operating permit invalid. Rules for selecting new tyres ! For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been specifically approved by smart for your vehicle. These are specially adap- ted to the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®. Only use tyres and wheels specifically tested and approved by smart. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addi- tion, when driving with a load, dimen- sional variations and different tyre defor- mation characteristics could cause the tyres to make contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. smart accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tyres or wheels other than those tested and approved. Information on wheels and tyres can be obtained at a qualified specialist work- shop, e.g. a smart centre. 158 Changing a wheel

Maintenance and care.

The service life of tyres depends on various

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 168 · Applies to: 453

factors, including the following: RDriving style RTyre pressure RMileage Observe the following rules for selecting new tyres: RObserve country-specific regulations which stipulate or recommend a certain tyre type for the vehicle. ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. ROnly tyres of the same size may be used on a single axle (left/right). ROnly use tyres of the same type (summer tyres, all-season tyres, winter tyres). RUse only wheel-tyre combinations approved by smart. RDo not wear tyres out too much. This oth- erwise significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). RReplace tyres after six years at the latest. i Recommended tyre pressures for various operating states can be found on the tyre pressure table on the driver's side door pillar (B-pillar). You can find further information regarding tyres and wheels at specialist tyre retailers, at qualified specialist workshops and at any smart centre. Preparing to change a wheel The vehicle tool tray is located under the glove compartment. X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the parking brake. X Position the front wheels to point straight ahead. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from ignition lock. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. Removing a wheel G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehi- cle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubs could otherwise be damaged when the bolts are tightened. ! Position a suitable jack only on the jack- ing points intended for this purpose. Never position the jack on the high-volt- age battery. Do not jack up the vehicle on the high-voltage battery. There is other- wise a risk of damaging the high-voltage battery. Also observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section. Warning stickers Changing a wheel 159

Maintenance and care. Z

Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps:

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 169 · Applies to: 453

X Using both hands, grasp two hub cap openings and remove the hub cap. Vehicles with steel wheels and hub cap cover: X Remove the hub cap cover. X Using wheel wrench : loosen the wheel bolts by about one turn. Do not unscrew the wheel bolts completely. The vehicle may only be raised at the desig- nated jacking points. These points ; are located in the front and the rear directly next to the wheels. Do not position jack = on the edge of sill :. Otherwise, damage to the vehicle could occur. X Position jack ; behind the triangular indentations for jacking point :. X Set the foot of the jack up vertically with respect to the jacking point on the vehicle. X Raise the vehicle using the jack until the tyre is a maximum of 3 cm off the ground. X Unscrew and remove the wheel bolts. X Remove the wheel. Fitting a wheel G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. 160 Changing a wheel

Maintenance and care.

Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 170 · Applies to: 453

when the vehicle is on the ground. ! When changing a wheel, use only wheel bolts that have been approved for the wheel rim and vehicle. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notices in "Changing a wheel" (Y page 158). Fit tyres with a specified direction of rota- tion only according to their direction of rota- tion. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Push the wheel onto the wheel hub and press it on. X Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them slightly. X Lower the vehicle all the way. X Remove the jack. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross- wise pattern in sequence indicated : to ?. The tightening torque must be 105 Nm. X Check the recommended tyre pressure and adjust if necessary. i Vehicles with tyre pressure control sys- tem: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps: X Fit hub cap A such that valve B does not become trapped. X Press the hub cap evenly onto the wheel with both hands until you hear the hub cap engage. X Check to make sure the hub cap is seated securely on the wheel. Vehicle with steel wheels and wheel hub cov- ers: X Fit the hub cap cover. Storing wheels X Store wheels in a cool, dry and dark place when not in use. X Protect against oil, grease and fuel. Using the tyre pressure monitor Useful information It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pres- sure suitable for the operating situation. The tyre pressure monitor issues a warning when the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor works properly only if sensors are present in all four tyres, Using the tyre pressure monitor 161

Maintenance and care. Z

and after the monitor has learned the correct

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 171 · Applies to: 453

tyre pressure for the current operating sit- uation. This occurs automatically in most situations, but may also be specified after restarting the tyre pressure monitor. Before restarting, check the tyres for the recom- mended tyre pressure. The tyre pressure monitor does not provide a warning in the following cases: REven loss of pressure on multiple tyres RSudden loss of tyre pressure, e.g. due to penetration by a foreign body RIncorrectly set tyre pressure The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Restarting the tyre pressure monitor (on-board computer with a mono- chrome display) X Set the tyre pressure of all tyres to the recommended value. X On the multifunction lever press the ´ button repeatedly until the ° and h symbols are displayed in the instrument cluster display. X Press and hold the a button on the mul- tifunction lever. The ° and h symbols flash in the instrument cluster display for approx- imately five seconds. The two symbols then light up. The tyre pressure monitor is restarted. Restarting the tyre pressure monitor (on-board computer with colour dis- play) X Set the tyre pressure of all tyres to the recommended value. X Select Settings > Tyre pressure monitor in the on-board computer. The Tyre pressure monitor Adopt cur‐ rent pressures as new reference val‐ ues? message appears in the display. X Select yes and press a to confirm. The display shows the Tyre pressure monitor restarted message. If the Tyre pressure monitor restarted message does not appear after five seconds, restart the tyre pressure monitor again. Checking the tyre pressures Please note G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres: Rat least every two weeks Rwhen the load changes Rbefore embarking on a longer journey Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. G WARNING If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tyre valves, the tyre valves may be over- loaded and malfunction, which can cause tyre pressure loss. Aftermarket tyre pres- sure monitoring systems will cause the tyre valve to remain open. This can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically approved by smart for your vehicle onto the tyre valve. G WARNING If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre 162 Checking the tyre pressures

Maintenance and care.

pressure that is too low may result in a tyre

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 172 · Applies to: 453

blow-out. There is a risk of accident. RCheck the tyre for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. H Environmental note Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days. The table with the recommended tyre pres- sure for various operating conditions can be found on the driver's side door pillar (B-pillar). The tyre pressure table may also state air pressures for different load conditions. These are defined in the table as different numbers of passengers and amounts of lug- gage. The actual number of seats may differ from this. If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the tyre pressure information following is only valid for that tyre size. If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pressures stated on the tyre pressure table apply for all approved tyres. Checking and correcting the tyre pres- sure manually Only check the tyre pressure once the tyres have cooled down. X Drive the vehicle less than 2 km. X Park the vehicle away from direct sunlight for at least three hours. X Check the tyre pressure with a suitable tyre pressure gauge. X If necessary, adjust the tyre pressure. X Restart tyre pressure monitor. Using winter tyres G WARNING M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as they do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of accident. M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced. At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tyres on your vehicle therefore to winter tyres or all-sea- son tyres marked with M+S. Using summer tyres at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tyres permanently. smart cannot accept responsi- bility for this type of damage. Have the vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. X At low temperatures, use only winter tyres marked with M+S. X When road conditions are wintry, use M+S tyres with the additional i snow- flake symbol. These tyres allow driving safety systems, e.g. ABS, to function optimally in the win- ter. X Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels. X When driving with M+S tyres, observe the specified maximum permissible speed. X Use only tyre types and sizes approved for smart. X When using tyres with a specified direc- tion of rotation, observe the arrow on the sidewall indicating the tyre's direction of rotation. Using winter tyres 163

Maintenance and care. Z

After fitting M+S tyres:

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 173 · Applies to: 453

X Check tyre pressure. X Restart tyre pressure monitor. X If M+S tyres with a lower maximum per- missible speed than that of the vehicle are fitted, affix an appropriate warning label in the driver's field of vision. Using the limiter, restrict the speed to the maximum permissible speed for M+S tyres. Using snow chains G WARNING If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may scrape against the vehi- cle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever fit snow chains on the front wheels Rfit snow chains to the rear wheels in pairs. ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you fit snow chains on steel wheels, you may damage the hub caps. Remove the hub caps from the relevant wheels before fitting the snow chains. For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by smart. Further information can be obtained at a smart centre or a qualified specialist work- shop. X Observe country-specific regulations. X Use only snow chains approved for smart. X Fit snow chains on both rear wheels. X Use snow chains only on snow-covered roads. X When driving with snow chains fitted, do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. Changing the window wiper blades Please note G WARNING If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. ! Never open the service cover or tailgate if a wiper arm has been folded away from the windscreen or rear window. Never fold a wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windscreen or rear window. Hold the wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the window, the window may be damaged by the force of the impact. Changing the window wiper blades on the windscreen X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind- screen. X Press release clips ; on mounting ? in the direction of windscreen 3. The catch tab is released from the mounting and the window wiper blades can be removed from the wiper arm. X Slide window wiper blade : in the direc- tion of arrow 5 until the securing hook for the window wiper blade is revealed. X Remove the window wiper blade. 164 Changing the window wiper blades

Maintenance and care.

X Slide new window wiper blade : in the

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 174 · Applies to: 453

direction of arrow 4 onto mounting = of wiper arm ;. The window wiper blade snaps into place. X Check that the window wiper blade is posi- tioned correctly. X Carefully fold wiper arm ; onto the wind- screen. Changing the rear window wiper blade X Remove key from ignition lock. X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear win- dow until you hear it engage. X Pull window wiper blade ; in the direc- tion of the arrow until it is released from the retainer on the wiper arm. X Remove window wiper blade ;. X Slide new window wiper blade ; onto wiper arm : until it engages. X Turn window wiper blade ; parallel to wiper arm :. X Check that window wiper blade ; is posi- tioned correctly. X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear win- dow. Cleaning the vehicle Useful information Regular care maintains the appearance and quality of the vehicle over time. Observe the following when cleaning and caring for the vehicle: X Do not clean the engine. X Do not clean the vehicle whilst charging. X Use soft, moist cloths. X Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved for smart. X Do not use acidic cleaning agents. X In winter, carefully remove road salt as soon as possible. Cleaning the vehicle exterior Washing in an automatic car wash or washing by hand Preparing the vehicle for cleaning G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after the vehicle has been washed. There is a risk of an accident. After washing the vehicle, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic con- ditions in order to restore full braking effi- ciency. X Close the side windows completely. X Switch off the climate control blower. X Turn the windscreen wipers to position 0. Washing in an automatic car wash X Prepare the vehicle for cleaning. X Remove excess dirt. X Drive through the automatic car wash. X Remove wax from the front windscreen and the wiper blades. i If the windscreen wipers leave smears after the vehicle has passed through the car wash, this may be caused by wax or other residue. This residue can be removed with washer fluid. Cleaning the vehicle 165

Maintenance and care. Z

Washing by hand

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 175 · Applies to: 453

X Locate a washing bay equipped for hand-

washing.

X Prepare the vehicle for cleaning.

X Apply mild cleaning agent with a soft

vehicle sponge.

X Thoroughly hose the vehicle with a gentle

jet of water; do not point the water jet

directly towards the air inlet grille.

X Dry the vehicle off with a chamois.

Cleaning with a high-pressure cleaner

G WARNING

The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt

grinders) can cause damage not visible

from the outside to tyres or chassis com-

ponents. Components damaged in this way

can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an

accident.

Do not use high-pressure cleaners with

circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle.

Have damaged tyres or chassis compo-

nents replaced immediately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least

30 cm between the vehicle and the high-

pressure cleaner nozzle. Information

about the correct distance is available

from the equipment manufacturer.

Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle

around when cleaning your vehicle.

Do not aim directly at any of the following:

Rtyres

Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc.

Relectrical components

Rbattery

Rconnectors

Rlights

Rseals

Rventilation slots

Damaged seals or electrical components

can lead to leaks or failures.

X Prepare the vehicle for cleaning.

X Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm

between the high-pressure cleaner nozzle

and the vehicle.

X Keep moving the nozzle whilst cleaning.

Cleaning the reversing camera

X Clean camera lens : with water and a soft

cloth.

Cleaning the sensors

Active Brake Assist sensor ; Parking aid sensors X Clean sensors with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis com- ponents. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. 166 Cleaning the vehicle

Maintenance and care.

Do not use high-pressure cleaners with

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 176 · Applies to: 453

circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis compo- nents replaced immediately. ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning prod- ucts to remove brake dust. This could dam- age wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park up your vehicle for a long period of time immediately after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner may lead to increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. You should therefore drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heat- ing up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked up for a long period of time. X Clean the wheels with an acid-free clean- ing agent. Cleaning the windows and windscreen wipers Cleaning the windows G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the wind- screen or wiper blades. X Place the wiper arms in the vertical posi- tion and fold them away from the window. X Clean the inside and outside of the win- dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent recommended for smart. X Clear deposits regularly from the wind- screen and rear window to ensure that water can drain unhindered. Cleaning the window wiper blades X Place the wiper arms in the vertical posi- tion and fold them away from the window. X Clean the window wiper blades with a soft cloth. X Fold the wiper arms back into place. Cleaning the panoramic roof ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic panes of the panorama roof. Do not use cleaning agents containing solvents X Apply mild cleaning agent for plastic win- dows and wipe off with a moist sponge. Cleaning the roof Dry cleaning X Brush from the front to the back using a soft brush. Wet cleaning X Dry clean first. X Wash down with a soft brush or sponge and lukewarm water. X Rinse with clean water. Cleaning the exterior lighting X Apply mild cleaning agent for plastic len- ses and wipe off with a wet sponge. Cleaning and caring for paintwork ! Do not affix stickers to the painted sur- face. Adhesive residue could damage the paintwork. X Remove impurities immediately by rub- bing carefully. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing care- fully with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. Cleaning the vehicle 167

Maintenance and care. Z

Cleaning the vehicle interior

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 177 · Applies to: 453

Cleaning the displays ! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol- lowing: Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol Rabrasive cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irrepar- able damage to the display. X Switch off the display and let it cool down. X Clean the display surface with a microfibre cloth and cleaner for TFT or LCD displays. X Dry the display surface using a dry micro- fibre cloth. Cleaning the steering wheel and the selector lever X Wipe off with a moist cloth, or use a leather care agent recommended for smart. Cleaning the seat belts G WARNING Seat belts may be severely weakened if bleached or coloured. This may lead to the seat belts, for example, tearing or failing in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never bleach or colour seat belts. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemi- cal cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts at temperatures above 80 † or in direct sunlight. X Clean the seat belts using only lukewarm soapy water. Cleaning and caring for seats Please note ! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean gen- uine leather or artificial leather covers, as these are too aggressive and, if used often, may damage the cover. Regular care maintains the appearance and feel of the seats over time. Cleaning and caring for genuine leather seat covers X Wet a cloth with water and clean the seat covers. Do not allow the leather to become soaked. X Wipe off with a dry cloth. X Apply a leather care agent recommended for smart. Cleaning synthetic leather seat covers X Wet a cloth with detergent water and clean the seat covers. Cleaning cloth seat covers X Wet a microfibre cloth with detergent water. X Rub cloth covers with care, cleaning entire sections of the cover. X Allow the seat to dry. Cleaning DINAMICA seat covers X Wet a cloth with water. X Clean entire sections of the cover. Cleaning the trim Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents con- taining solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. This could result in plastic parts breaking away when the airbags are deployed. There is a danger of injury. Do not use care products and cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the cockpit. ! Never attach the following to plastic sur- faces: Rstickers Rfilms Rperfume oil container or similar You could otherwise damage the plastic. 168 Cleaning the vehicle

Maintenance and care.

To maintain the appearance of high-quality

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 178 · Applies to: 453

plastic surfaces, do not allow surfaces to come into contact with cosmetics, insect repellents or sun creams. X Clean the plastic trim with a damp cloth. X Use care products and cleaning agents recommended for smart to remove heavy soiling. Cleaning the roof lining X Remove heavy soiling using a soft brush or a cleaning agent recommended for smart. Cleaning the carpets X Use carpet and textile cleaning agents rec- ommended for smart. Cleaning the trim elements ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel clean- ers, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. X Clean the trim elements with a moist microfibre cloth. X Use care products and cleaning agents recommended for smart to remove heavy soiling. Observing service due dates The ¯ and ° indicator lamps in the instrument cluster display are reminders of upcoming service due dates: R¯: minor service. R°: major service. Monochrome display: the indicator lamp flashes for a few seconds after the engine is started. Depending on the operating condi- tions of the vehicle, the time or distance remaining until the service is due, is also displayed. The service interval is based on normal oper- ation of the vehicle. Observe the following if the vehicle is operated under arduous con- ditions or increased loads, e.g. regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops: X Carry out service work more often than specified by the service interval. X Check the tyres more frequently. Current information on the type of service can be obtained at a smart centre or a quali- fied specialist workshop. Parking up the vehicle ! Please note that if the vehicle is not used for prolonged periods, vehicle damage may occur and the battery may discharge or become damaged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop for a consultation. Parking up the vehicle 169

Maintenance and care. Z

Securing the vehicle in the event of an

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 179 · Applies to: 453

accident or a breakdown Securing the vehicle ! When a tyre is damaged, the danger area must be kept clear of all persons. X Stop the vehicle away from traffic on solid, non-slippery ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lights. X Turn the front wheels to the straight- ahead position. X Switch off the engine. X Passengers should leave the vehicle. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Set up the warning triangle. In the event of a flat tyre, without TIREFIT the vehicle cannot be made roadworthy again using the on-board equipment. No emer- gency call can be made via the smart Audio- System. The vehicle owner and the driver of the vehicle are responsible for equipping the vehicle with an appropriate breakdown kit and seeking assistance in the event of a breakdown. Switching the hazard warning lamps on and off When the hazard warning lamps are switched on, all the turn signal lamps flash. The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on in the following cases: Ran airbag is deployed. Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 70 km/h and comes to a standstill. The hazard warning lamps switch off auto- matically if a speed of 10 km/h is exceeded again after full brake application. X To switch on the hazard warning lamps manually: press button :. Operating the emergency assistance system Useful information For Russia only: The emergency assistance system is there to rescue you and others in an emergency. Should the driver arrive at the scene of an accident, or feel unwell, an emergency call can be initiated. The emergency call must not be deployed in the case of a breakdown or a similar, non-dangerous situation. The emergency assistance system can help to radically reduce the time between an acci- dent and the arrival of the emergency serv- ices. The requirement is a stable mobile phone connection; network coverage can depend on the region. If there is no safety risk, in the event of an accident the vehicle occupants should remain in the vehicle after initiating an emergency call. The emergency assistance system has a sep- arate battery. The battery only functions within a temperature range of -20 † to 85 †. The battery must be replaced every four years. Always have work on the battery car- ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Method of operation After an emergency call has been initiated, the emergency call centre will ascertain if assistance is required on location. 170 Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

In the event of an emergency, accident data

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 180 · Applies to: 453

is forwarded to a public emergency call

centre.

The data transferred includes:

RGPS/GLONASS position data

RDirection of travel

RTime of initiation

This allows measures for rescue, recovery or

towing away to be initiated quickly.

The emergency assistance system consists of

a loudspeaker, the control panel and the tel-

ecommunication system. The control panel is

located in the overhead control panel.

Automatic emergency call indicator lamp ; Microphone = SOS button ? Call and reception status indicator lamp Using test mode In test mode, the driver can check if the emergency assistance system is working. To do this, a voice message from the driver is recorded and the test result is transmitted to the emergency call centre. X Briefly press SOS button = several times within five seconds. X Wait for 25 seconds. X Briefly press SOS button = three times within ten seconds. A tone sounds. Microphone ; records for ten seconds. X Speak any message. A signal sounds after 25 seconds. The recorded message is played back via the loudspeaker. X If the voice message is correctly played back, press and hold SOS button = for five seconds. Indicator lamp ? flashes green slowly. or X If the voice message is incorrectly played back or not played back at all, press SOS button = three times within three sec- onds. Indicator lamp ? flashes red slowly for five seconds. Automatic emergency call Indicator lamp : shows if an automatic emergency call can be initiated. If airbags are deployed, the emergency assistance system automatically notifies an emergency centre. i The automatic emergency call is opera- tional as standard. Triggering an emergency call manually Manually initiating an emergency call as a person involved in an accident: X Press and hold SOS button = for three sec- onds. An emergency call is made. Manually initiating an emergency call after witnessing an accident: X Press SOS button = five times within ten seconds. The emergency call centre is informed of the accident. Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown 171

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Securing the vehicle against rolling

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 181 · Applies to: 453

away Securing on level ground X When changing a wheel, place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally oppo- site the wheel you wish to change. Securing on a downhill gradient X Place wheel chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle. Using the warning triangle Removing the warning triangle Warning triangle : is located in the boot behind the seat backrest, secured to the car- pet with a Velcro fastener. Return it to this location after use. X Remove warning triangle : from the boot. Setting up the warning triangle X Fold feet 3 out to the side. X Pull side reflectors 2 upwards to form a triangle. X Connect the reflectors using upper stud 1. X Place the warning triangle at a suitable distance. 172 Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Using a reflective safety jacket

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 182 · Applies to: 453

Notes on reflective safety jackets

Maximum number of washes ; Maximum wash temperature = Do not bleach ? Do not iron A Do not use a tumble dryer B Do not dry-clean C This is a class 2 jacket The reflective safety jacket only meets the requirements defined by the legal standard if it is the right size and fully closed when in use. Replace the reflective safety jacket: Rif it is damaged or there is irremovable dirt on the reflective stripes Rif you exceed the maximum number of washes Rif the fluorescence has faded Removing the reflective safety jacket The reflective safety jacket is located in stowage compartment : of the front- passenger door. Reflective safety jackets can also be stored in the rear door stowage com- partments. X To remove: take out the safety jacket bag containing the reflective safety jacket. X Open the safety jacket bag and take out the reflective safety jacket. X To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll it up and stow it in the safety jacket bag. X Replace the safety jacket bag in stowage compartment :. Removing the first-aid kit i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace any missing parts. First-aid kit ; is located in the boot behind the seat backrest, secured to the carpet with a Velcro fastener. Return it to this location after use. X Remove first-aid kit ; from the boot. Removing the fire extinguisher The fire extinguisher is located underneath the front passenger seat. Removing the fire extinguisher 173

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Removing the vehicle tool tray

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 183 · Applies to: 453

The towing eye and the TIREFIT kit are loca- ted in the vehicle tool tray under the glove compartment. X Remove bolts in the front-passenger foot- well. X Remove the vehicle tool tray. Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit Useful information The tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. TIREFIT is a tyre sealant. TIREFIT is used to seal punctures of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread, at outside tempera- tures down to Ò20 †. i The tyre inflation compressor weighs approximately 0.7 kg. At a distance of approximately 60 cm from the tyre inflation compressor, the following sound pressure level applies: RX-axis: 82.9 dB (A) RY-axis: 84.3 dB (A) RZ-axis: 84.1 dB (A) The tyre inflation compressor is mainte- nance-free. If there is a malfunction, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Please note G WARNING In the following situations, the tyre seal- ant is unable to provide sufficient break- down assistance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pres- sures or on a flat tyre. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive any further. Contact a quali- fied specialist workshop. G WARNING The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swal- lowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tyre seal- ant, observe the following: RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immedi- ately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek med- ical attention immediately. G WARNING A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is 174 Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

not suitable for higher speeds. There is a

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 184 · Applies to: 453

risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant. The maximum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. ! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out of the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plas- tic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit. H Environmental note Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Comply with the manufacturer's safety instructions on the sticker on the tyre infla- tion compressor. Filling with tyre sealant X Leave foreign bodies which have penetra- ted the tyre in the tyre. X Remove the vehicle tool tray. X Remove the TIREFIT kit, consisting of a tyre sealant bottle and a tyre inflation compressor, from the vehicle tool kit. X Affix the 80 km/h maximum speed sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. X Unwind plug : with the cable from tyre inflation compressor ;. X Remove hose A from the bottom section of tyre inflation compressor ;. X Unscrew the cap from tyre sealant bot- tle ?. X Connect hose A. X Remove the valve flap from valve E on the faulty tyre. X Unscrew the cap from filler hose =. X Screw filler hose = onto valve E. X Insert connector : into the cigarette lighter socket or the 12 V socket. X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. X Press on/off switch B on tyre inflation compressor ; to position 1. The tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approx- imately 600 kPa (6.0 bar/86 psi) in pressure gauge C. i Preventing damage to the tyre inflation compressor Do not switch off the tyre inflation com- pressor during this phase. X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a maximum of 15 minutes, then allow it to cool down. The tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) in pressure gauge C. Allow any leaking tyre sealant to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. Have any clothing stained with tyre sealant cleaned as soon as possible with perchloro- ethylene. Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit 175

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z

Further procedure if the pressure of the

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 185 · Applies to: 453

sealed tyre is below 180 kPa G WARNING If the specified tyre pressure still cannot be reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and low tyre pressures can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving character- istics. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive any further. Contact a quali- fied specialist workshop. X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the defective tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may escape when unscrewing. X Slowly move the vehicle approximately 10 m forwards or backwards. X Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of 15 minutes, the tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar, 26 psi). Further procedure if the pressure of the sealed tyre is at least 180 kPa X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the hose from the valve of the defective tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may escape when unscrewing. X Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre inflation compressor. X Perform a test drive. The maximum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. X Stop after driving for approximately 3 km and check the tyre pressure with the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). The precise values are located on the door pillar (B-pillar) on the driver's side. X If necessary, adjust the tyre pressure. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve on the sealed tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may escape when unscrewing. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tyre. X Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filler hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the tyre sealant bottle and filler hose replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Adjusting the tyre pressure Increasing the tyre pressure X Switch on the tyre inflation compressor. X Observe the display. Reducing the tyre pressure X Press button : next to pressure gauge ;. i Even unused tyre sealant loses its effec- tiveness over time. Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist work- shop. 176 Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Towing the vehicle

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 186 · Applies to: 453

Please note G WARNING Safety relevant functions are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe brake system or power steering is malfunctioning Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system. When your vehicle is towed, you may require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases use a rigid towing bar. Before towing away, make sure the steering moves freely. G WARNING If the steering wheel lock is engaged, the vehicle can no longer be steered. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch on the ignition when towing with a tow rope or a towing bar. G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rtowing eye may be torn off Rcar/trailer combination may swerve or even overturn There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. Information on the vehicle's permissible gross weight can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 207). ! Observe the following points when tow- ing with a tow rope: Rsecure the tow rope on the same side on both vehicles. Rmake sure that the tow rope is not longer than legally permitted. Mark the tow rope in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This makes other road users aware that a vehicle is being towed. Ronly secure the tow rope to the towing eye. Robserve the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance so that the tow rope does not sag. Rdo not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. You could otherwise dam- age the vehicle. ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery purposes as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. For towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle must be lifted up and transported. Observe the legal requirements for the rele- vant countries when towing. Always have the vehicle transported in the following cases: RThe warning lamp lights up and Do not tow vehicle with wheels on ground appears in the display of the instrument cluster. RThe multifunction display is not working. ROne or more of the following warning lamps is lit up: - þ drive diagnostics (red) - # 12 V battery RThe brake pedal begins to pulsate as soon as the towing procedure commences. RThe vehicle must be moved over a long dis- tance. The transmission must be in position i when the vehicle is being towed. Towing the vehicle 177

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z

i Before the vehicle is towed, switch off the

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 187 · Applies to: 453

automatic locking feature. The driver could otherwise be locked out when push- ing or having the vehicle towed. i Vehicles with the basic carrier fitted: Do not tow the vehicle with the basic car- rier fitted. Do not secure the tow rope or tow bar to the basic carrier. Observe the notes on the selector lever when towing the vehicle. Fitting the towing eye The towing eye can be attached to the front or rear of the vehicle. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool tray. X Carefully prise off cover : on the vehicle. X Screw in the towing eye to the stop. Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- tion i. The selector lever lock can be manually released in the event of an electrical mal- function. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lights. Transporting the vehicle ! Only secure the vehicle by the wheels or rims, not by parts of the vehicle such as the axle or steering components. Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Shift the transmission to position i. As soon as the vehicle is loaded: X Apply the parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Remove the key. X Lash down the vehicle. Removing the towing eye X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. X Attach the cover to the recess at the top and engage it at the bottom. X Stow the towing eye in the vehicle tool tray. Manually releasing the selector lever lock In cases of an electrical fault the selector lever lock can be manually deactivated, e.g. if the parking lock has been deactivated for towing and should subsequently be re- applied. 178 Manually releasing the selector lever lock

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

! Do not use any sharp-edged objects to

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 188 · Applies to: 453

prise out the cover from the centre console. Otherwise, the cover or the centre console could be damaged. X Apply the parking brake. X Open the drawer on the front-passenger side. X Prise out cover : on the centre console from bottom edge ; using with a flat, blunt object. X Pull cover : in the direction of the arrow. X Pull yellow release = behind the trim up and simultaneously press release but- ton ? on the selector lever. X Shift the gear selector lever to position i or j. Replacing the bulbs Please note G WARNING Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can become very hot during use. When replac- ing a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before replacing the bulb. Observe the following rules when replacing bulbs: ROnly replace bulbs when the engine is switched off. RDo not use bulbs that have been dropped or show signs of visible damage, e.g. scratches. RDo not touch the glass bulb with your bare hands. ROnly use bulbs in enclosed lamps designed for that purpose. ROnly fit spare bulbs of the same type and with a specified voltage. RDo not allow bulbs to come into contact with moisture. RHave LEDs changed at qualified specialist workshops only. Change only the bulbs described below your- self in accordance with the specified bulb types. Replacing front bulbs Changing dipped-beam and main-beam headlamps X Switch off the lights. X Open the service cover. X Remove cover :. X Pull out the connector. X Press retainer ; inwards and to the left. X Pull the bulb out. Replacing the bulbs 179

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z

X Insert the new bulb.

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 189 · Applies to: 453

X Lock retainer ;.

X Insert the connector.

X Replace and engage cap :.

Replacing the front turn signal lamps

X Switch off the lights.

X Turn the respective front wheel inwards.

X Push clamp : downwards.

X Remove cover ; upwards.

X Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise and

remove it.

X Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb.

X Insert the bulb holder and turn it clock-

wise until it engages.

X Insert and engage cover ;.

Replacing the side turn signal lamps

X Carefully insert a flat tool into recess :.

X Prise out side turn signal ;.

X Turn bulb holder in side turn signal ; 90°

anti-clockwise and remove it.

X Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.

X Insert the bulb holder into side turn sig-

nal ; and turn it 90° clockwise.

X Refit side turn signal ;.

Replacing rear bulbs

Replacing the tail lamp bulbs

Tail lamps without partial LEDs

Rear/brake lamp

; Rear fog lamp

= Reversing lamp

? Turn signals

Tail lamps with partial LEDs

Turn signals ; Reversing lamp 180 Replacing the bulbs

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Removing the tail lamp cover

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 190 · Applies to: 453

X Switch off the lights.

X Open the tailgate.

X Loosen screws :.

X Remove the tail lamp.

X Carefully insert a flat tool under the plas-

tic hanger on the tail lamp.

X Lift the connector and remove it.

Replacing a faulty tail lamp bulb

Rear lamp/brake lamp (vehicles without partial LEDs) ; Turn signals = Reversing lamp ? Rear fog lamp (vehicles without partial LEDs) X Release four tabs A on the bulb holder. X Remove the bulb holder. X Pull the faulty bulb out. X Insert the new bulb. X Refit the bulb holder. X Insert the connector. X Insert the tail lamp until you hear it engage. X Tighten the screws on the tail lamp. Replacing the licence plate lighting X Insert a flat tool into recess :. X Remove the cover from the licence plate lamp. X Remove the bulb from the holder. X Insert the new bulb into the holder. X Insert the lamp lens into the licence plate lamp. Replacing the interior lighting X Insert a flat tool into the recess. X Prise out lamp lens :. X Remove the bulb from the holder. X Insert the new bulb into the holder. X Refit the lamp lens. Changing fuses Please note G WARNING If you manipulate, bridge or replace a faulty fuse with a fuse of a higher amper- Changing fuses 181

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z

age, the electric cables could be overloa-

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 191 · Applies to: 453

ded. This may result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses of the correct amperage. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for smart vehicles and which have the cor- rect fuse rating for the system concerned. Components or systems could otherwise be damaged. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. The electrical fuses disconnect defective cir- cuits. If a fuse blows, all the connected com- ponents and their functions will fail. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart (Y page 210). If new fuses blow, the cause for this must be diagnosed and rectified at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Preparing the vehicle to change a fuse X Apply the parking brake. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Turn the key to position u in the ignition lock and remove it. X Check whether all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Replacing a fuse (left-hand drive vehi- cle) ! Do not use a pointed object such as a screwdriver to open the cover in the dash- board. You could damage the dashboard or the cover. X Open the front-passenger door. X Open the glove compartment. X To open: open cover : in the direction of the arrow. X Replace the faulty fuse. X To close: insert and fold in cover : until it engages. X Close the glove compartment. Replacing a fuse (right-hand drive vehicle) X Open the driver’s door. X To open: turn quick-release fastener ; by 90° using a suitable object. X Fold down cover :. X Replace the faulty fuse. X To close: close cover :. X Close quick-release fastener ;. 182 Changing fuses

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Replacing the key battery

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 192 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub- stances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollu- tants. It is illegal to dis- pose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected sepa- rately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling sys- tem. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally respon- sible manner. Take dis- charged batteries to a qualified specialist work- shop or to a collection point for used batteries. X Fixed keys: unscrew screw :. X Insert a flat tool, e.g. a coin, into the recess. X Turn the tool until the cover of the battery tray opens. X Replace battery ; with the positive ter- minal facing upwards. X Replace the cover on the battery tray and push it closed. X Fixed keys: screw in screw :. X Check the function of all key buttons. Opening a door with the emergency release Opening a door with the emergency release 183

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z

If the vehicle cannot be opened using the

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 193 · Applies to: 453

remote control key, the vehicle can be opened using the emergency release. If the driver's door is unlocked and opened with the key in the emergency release, the anti-theft alarm system will issue an alarm. To disable the alarm, switch on the ignition. X Insert the key into the emergency release on the driver's door. X Turn the key anti-clockwise. X Remove the key from the lock. X Open the door. X To disable the alarm from the anti-theft alarm system: switch on the ignition. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the emer- gency release is located on the front- passenger door. Locking the doors in an emergency Locking the doors with the locking but- ton X Open the driver’s door. X Close the other doors and the tailgate. X Press and hold button :. An audible lock- ing and unlocking sound can be heard. Wait until the third (locking) sound, before releasing button :. X Leave the vehicle and close the driver's door. The doors, tailgate and socket cap are locked. The anti-theft alarm system is primed. X From the outside, check that the doors, tailgate and socket cap are locked. Locking the doors with the emergency locking X Insert the key into slot : on the left door. X Turn the key towards the bonnet as far as it will go to position 2. X Close the left door. X Repeat the procedure described above on the right door. X Check that the doors are locked. i If you lock the vehicle using emergency locking, the tailgate and socket cap are not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not primed. Unlocking the tailgate with the emer- gency release ! The tailgates swing to the rear, both upwards and downwards, when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is suffi- cient clearance above, behind and below the tailgates. If the tailgate can no longer be opened from outside the vehicle, it can be opened from the inside using the emergency release. 184 Unlocking the tailgate with the emergency release

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

X Fold the rear seat backrest forward.

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 194 · Applies to: 453

X Slide lever : on the tailgate to the left until the tailgate is unlocked. Unlocking the tailgate with the emergency release 185

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z

Notes on display messages

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 195 · Applies to: 453

The display shows warnings, malfunctions or additional information. A warning tone also sounds with some display messages. Messages from all categories can contain important information that must be observed. Have error messages checked at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as soon as possible. If an error message is not followed up with a repair, this can lead to damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty including injuries or material damage. Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the display. Colour display: low-priority display mes- sages can be hidden by pressing a on the steering wheel. High-priority messages are shown in red. The display messages are then stored in the message memory and can be called up for as long as the ignition remains switched on. Switching off the ignition clears the message memory. Locking and unlocking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Key will not lock or unlock the vehicle. A strong source of radio waves is interfering with the signal. X Stand closer to the door lock and try to lock/unlock the vehicle again. Key battery is low or discharged. X Unlock the vehicle with the key in the emergency release or lock the vehicle with emergency locking. X Replace the key battery. Key is faulty. To lock: X Press the locking button and close the door within five seconds. The vehicle still will not lock. X Lock driver's door using emergency locking. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. To unlock: X Unlock vehicle with the key in the emergency release. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Key is lost. X Have the key deactivated or replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. X Report loss of the key to vehicle insurer. Warning tone sounds. Driver's door is opened while the engine is running. Switch off the engine before leaving the vehicle: X Apply the parking brake. X Select transmission position j. X Turn the key to position u in the ignition lock and remove it. 186 Locking and unlocking

Practical advice.

Problem

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 196 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Side window will not close or will not open or close fully. Objects are obstructing the window guide. X Remove objects. Side window is not reset. G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. X Close all doors. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the switch for closing the window until the window is closed, and then push the switch for one second. The side window opens again a little way. X Repeat previous step until the window remains closed after releasing the switch. Folding top will not close. Folding top is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly. X Immediately after it is obstructed, press the top part of the folding top switch again until the folding roof is fully closed. Folding top is closed with increased force. C Red warning lamp is lit. If the speed exceeds 20 km/h, a warning tone also sounds. Colour display: the dis- play shows an open door/tailgate. Door or tailgate is open. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Close all doors and the tailgate. Locking and unlocking 187

Practical advice. Z

Vision, vehicle occupants, airbag

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 197 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The exterior mirror is not engaged. The exterior mirror has been moved forwards or backwards by force. X Carefully move the exterior mirror to the correct position. The windscreen wipers have malfunctioned. The windscreen wipers are obstructed, e.g. by snow. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Remove the key from ignition lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers on again after 30 seconds. The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The windscreen wipers will not stop or always wipe at the same speed. The combination switch or rain sensor is malfunctioning. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Remove the key from ignition lock. X Insert the key into the ignition lock, turn to position 1 and start the engine. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The red 7 warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds after starting the engine (certain countries only). A warning tone sounds. The warning lamp prompts the driver and front passenger to fas- ten their seat belts. X Fasten the seat belts. The red 7 warning lamp lights up after starting the engine. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten the seat belts. The red 7 warning lamp flashes. A warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt and the vehicle is travelling faster than 20 km/h. X Fasten the seat belts. 188 Vision, vehicle occupants, airbag

Practical advice.

Problem

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 198 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red 6 warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Colour display: Mal‐ function Visit work‐ shop appears. The restraint system is malfunctioning. G WARNING If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The 4 indicator lamp on the overhead control panel lights up. The front-passenger front airbag has been disabled (Y page 41). X Enable the front-passenger front airbag. The front-passenger front airbag has not been disabled and is malfunctioning. X Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. X Do not allow passengers to travel on the front-passenger seat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The × indicator lamp on the overhead control panel lights up. Front-passenger front airbag is enabled (Y page 41). The airbag system is operating correctly. X Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. The × indicator lamp on the overhead control panel does not light up if the front- passenger front airbag has been enabled man- ually. There is a malfunction in the airbag system. X Do not allow passengers to travel on the front-passenger seat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Vision, vehicle occupants, airbag 189

Practical advice. Z

Engine, brakes, transmission

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 199 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine will not start using the key. The steering lock is manually locked. X Remove the key from the ignition lock and then reinsert it into the ignition lock. X Turn the key. X Turn the steering wheel left and right. The red þ warning lamp lights up. A warning tone sounds. Without starting motor again, visit workshop appears. There is a serious malfunction in the high-voltage electrical sys- tem. The engine can no longer be started. X Do not restart the engine. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The red þ warning lamp lights up. Stop Switch off motor appears. The high-voltage electrical system, engine or high-voltage bat- tery is malfunctioning. X Switch off the engine. X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels. The red þ warning lamp lights up. A warning tone sounds. Stop appears. Communication with the engine's control unit is malfunctioning. X Switch off the engine. X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels. The yellow þ warn- ing lamp lights up. A warning tone sounds. Malfunction Visit workshop appears. There is a malfunction in the high-voltage electrical system. The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may become damaged if you continue running the engine. X Switch off the engine. X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels. The red þ warning lamp lights up. A warning tone sounds. Reduce speed appears. The speed of the vehicle is above 135 km/h. X Reduce the speed to below 135 km/h. lights up. Do not tow vehicle with wheels on ground appears. The drive system or high-voltage electrical system is faulty. X Have the vehicle transported by a qualified specialist work- shop. X Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels. 190 Engine, brakes, transmission

Practical advice.

Problem

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 200 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red J warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. A warning tone sounds. Colour display: Check brake fluid level appears. Brake fluid level is too low. G WARNING If the brake fluid level is too low the brake system may fail. There is a risk of an accident. Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Secure the vehicle by applying the parking brake. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immedi- ately and have the brake system repaired. Do not top up the brake fluid, as this will not rectify the fault. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The red J warning lamp lights up while driving. A warning tone sounds. Colour display: Release parking brake appears. The parking brake is applied. X Release the parking brake. The red J warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. A warning tone sounds. Colour display: Brake system malfunction Stop appears. There is a serious malfunction in the brake system. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow J warn- ing lamp lights up. Colour display: Mal‐ function Visit work‐ shop appears. There is a malfunction in the vacuum supply of the brake system. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Monochrome display: i or j flash alter- nately in the middle of the display. Colour display: To start engine: shift to P or N appears. An attempt was made to start the engine with the transmission in position h or k. X Shift to j or i to start. Engine, brakes, transmission 191

Practical advice. Z

Problem

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 201 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Monochrome display: j or h/k, i flash alternately. A warning tone sounds. Colour display: Risk of vehicle rolling away Transmission not in P appears. A warning tone sounds. The driver's door is open and the selector lever is in position k, i or h. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift to position j. X Switch off the engine. X Close the driver's door completely. ¯ or ° warning lamp flashes for a few seconds after starting the engine. Colour display: Next service due in … km or Service due … days ago appears. A service due date is approaching or has already passed: R¯ indicates a minor service. R° indicates a full service. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Charging process Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The charge socket flap cannot be opened. The charge socket flap is not unlocked. X Press the # button on the key. The key batteries are discharged. X Opening a door with the emergency release The charging cable cannot be plugged into the vehicle socket. The vehicle socket is locked. X Make sure that the selector lever is in position j. The indicator lamp on the vehicle socket flashes red. The high- voltage battery is not being charged. A fault occurred while initializing the charging process. X Make sure that the charging cable is plugged into the mains socket. X Disconnect the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket and plug it back into the vehicle socket after 30 seconds. X If the malfunction should persist, inform a qualified specialist workshop. 192 Charging process

Practical advice.

Problem

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 202 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp on the vehicle socket remains off after the charging cable con- nector has been con- nected to the vehicle socket. When charging using a mains socket, the high-voltage bat- tery is not charged. There is a malfunction at the mains socket. X Have the mains socket checked to ensure that it is working correctly. or X Use a different mains socket. è lights up. Warning tone sounds. Charger cable con‐ nected appears. The charging cable is plugged into the vehicle socket. The engine cannot be started. X Before driving off, disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle socket and stow it away in the vehicle. è flashes. Charging cable not inserted correctly appears. The charge cable is connected to the vehicle socket. The battery is not being charged. X Make sure that the charging cable is correctly plugged into the sockets on the vehicle and power connection. If necessary, dis- connect the charging cable from the sockets and then reconnect it. If the message continues to be displayed: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The charging cable connector cannot be removed from the vehi- cle socket. The charging cable connector is not unlocked. X Press the # button on the key. This unlocks the charging cable connector in the vehicle socket. X Remove charging cable connector from the vehicle socket. Charging not possi‐ ble Power supply interrupted appears. The high-voltage battery cannot be charged. The charge current was interrupted during the charging process. X Make sure that the charging cable is plugged into the mains socket. X Disconnect the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket and plug it back into the vehicle socket after 30 seconds. If the message continues to be displayed: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Charging process 193

Practical advice. Z

Problem

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 203 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Charging not possi‐ ble s. Owner's Man‐ ual appears. Communication with the charging point infrastructure is not functioning correctly. X Make sure that the charging cable is correctly plugged into the sockets on the vehicle and power connection. If necessary, dis- connect the charging cable from the sockets and then reconnect it. If the message continues to be displayed: X Use a different charging station. If the message continues to be displayed: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. þ Yellow warning lamp lights up. Charging not possi‐ ble Visit workshop appears. The vehicle electronics are malfunctioning. The high-voltage battery cannot be charged. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. þ Yellow warning lamp lights up. Charging not possi‐ ble s. Owner's Man‐ ual appears. The high-voltage battery cannot be charged. The charging cable connector is overheated. X Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket. X Allow the charging cable connector to cool off for several minutes. X Plug the charging cable back into the vehicle socket. If the message continues to be displayed: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The indicator lamp on the vehicle socket does not light up. The high- voltage battery is not being charged. The vehicle is inactive. X Activate the vehicle by pressing the # button on the key and lock it again. The charging cable cannot be removed. The vehicle is in charging mode or has completed active charging. X Unlock the charging lock by pressing the # button on the key. 194 Charging process

Practical advice.

Driving safety systems

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 204 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! Yellow warning lamp lights up. Colour display: System inoperative appears. ABS is malfunctioning. Other driving systems may be deactiva- ted. If ABS is faulty, there is also a possibility that other driving sys- tems may be unavailable. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster. G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steer- ability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the infor- mation on the ABS warning lamp and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. J Red warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Brake force distribution inoperative. Stop See Owner's Manual appears. EBD is malfunctioning. This means that ABS, ESP®, Crosswind Assist and Hill start assist are also unavailable. Other driving systems may be deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock early if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in emergency brak- ing situations. If ESP® is not operational, the vehicle will not be stabilised by ESP®. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems 195

Practical advice. Z

Problem

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 205 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ Monochrome dis- play: yellow warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. ÷ Colour display: yellow warning lamp lights up. System inoperative appears. ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Other driving systems may be deactivated. G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehi- cle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Brake lamps may be inoperative and thus no longer working when braking. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not drive on. X Check that the brake lamps are working. The brake lamps are not working. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Brake lamps are working. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ÷ Colour display: yellow warning lamp lights up. Brake Assist System (BAS) inoperative appears. The Brake Assist System (BAS) is inoperative. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ÷ Yellow warning lamp flashes while driving. ESP® is intervening because there is a risk of skidding or at least one of the wheels is spinning. X Pull away carefully. X Accelerate carefully whilst driving. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather condi- tions. ÷ and C and other warning lamps are lit. Colour display: Elec‐ tronics malfunction Visit workshop appears. Central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. After switching off the engine, it is no longer possible to lock or unlock the doors using the remote control on the key or to start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 196 Driving safety systems

Practical advice.

Problem

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 206 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Colour display: ÷ Hill start assist inoperative appears. Hill start assist is malfunctioning. Vehicle will not be held auto- matically when pulling away uphill and may start rolling imme- diately. G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehi- cle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Other driving systems may be deactivated. The brake system functions normally, but without hill start assist. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. h Yellow warning lamp lights up while driving. Colour display: Cor‐ rect tyre pressure appears. The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check tyre pressure. X Correct the tyre pressure. X Restart tyre pressure monitor. Driving safety systems 197

Practical advice. Z

Problem

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 207 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h Yellow warning lamp lights up while driving. Colour display: Tyre pressure Caution tyre malfunction appears. The tyre pressure monitor has detected a significant loss of pres- sure in at least one of the tyres. G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres: Rat least every two weeks Rwhen the load changes Rbefore embarking on a longer journey Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Check tyres visually and, if necessary, follow the instructions for flat tyres. X Check the tyre pressure and correct it if necessary. h Yellow warning lamp flashes for approximately one minute and then stays lit. Colour display: Tyre pressure monitor inoperative appears. The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning or was not restarted after a wheel change. G WARNING If you correct the tyre pressure without recalibrating the Run Flat Indicator, the system cannot issue a warning about a defective tyre in time. In the event of tyre pressure loss, the driving characteristics and the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. If you correct the tyre pressure, you must recalibrate the Run Flat Indicator. X Restart tyre pressure monitor. The display message continues to be displayed. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 198 Driving safety systems

Practical advice.

Problem

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 208 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h Yellow warning lamp flashes for approximately 60 seconds and then remains lit. Colour display: Tyre pressure monitor inoperative wheel sensors missing appears. There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more wheels. G WARNING Risk of accident due to undetected tyre pressure losses. The sys- tem is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre pressure. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Wheels have unsuitable tyre pressure sensors. X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. J Red warning lamp is lit. ÷, ! yellow warning lamps light up while the engine is running. Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Elec‐ tronics malfunction Stop See Owner's Manual appears. The following systems are malfunctioning: RABS (anti-lock braking system) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) RCrosswind Assist RHill start assist Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The risk of skidding and having an accident increases due to malfunctioning driving safety systems. The brake system functions normally, but without the systems listed. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. This will greatly impair the ability to steer and brake. The brak- ing distance may increase in emergency braking situations. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems 199

Practical advice. Z

Problem

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 209 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Monochrome display: D yellow warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Power assistance may be malfunctioning, making steering diffi- cult. G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. If you are able to steer safely: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. D Yellow warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Colour display: Steer‐ ing malfunction See Owner's Manual or Electronics mal‐ function See Own‐ er's Manual appears. Power assistance may be malfunctioning, making steering diffi- cult. G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. If you are able to steer safely: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driver assistance systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · Red warning lamp is lit. Warning tone sounds. Collision warning detects an obstacle on the road. X Pay careful attention to the road and traffic conditions and be ready to brake. · Red warning lamp is lit. Distance to the vehicle in front is too short for the current speed. X Increase the distance. ^ Yellow warning lamp lights up while driving. Colour display: Active Brake Assist inoper‐ The sensors in the radiator trim are dirty. X Clean the sensors. 200 Driver assistance systems

Practical advice.

Problem

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 210 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ative or Electronics malfunction Visit workshop appears. Environmental influences or error sources outside the system are temporarily interfering with Active Brake Assist and radar- assisted recuperation. Possible causes: Rheavy rain or snow Roperating temperature is too high Ron-board voltage is too low Active Brake Assist is automatically operational again when the causes listed no longer apply. Warning lamp remains lit: X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Clean the sensors. X Restart the engine. Warning lamp still remains lit: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ^ and C as well as other warning lamps are lit. Central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. After switching off the engine, it is no longer possible to lock or unlock the doors using the remote control on the key or to start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Ã flashes for approximately three seconds. Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Lane Keeping Assist inop‐ erative appears. Windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Clean the windscreen. Environmental influences are interfering with Lane Keeping Assist. Possible causes: Rheavy rain or snow or thick fog is impairing visibility Rthe sun is low in the sky and shining directly onto the sensor Rlane markings cannot be detected Lane Keeping Assist is automatically operational again when the causes listed no longer apply. If the windscreen is clean and the causes listed do not apply, then the electronics are malfunctioning. System electronics are faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driver assistance systems 201

Practical advice. Z

Problem

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 211 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ¤ flashes for a max- imum of five seconds. Colour display: the green à warning lamp flashes for a max- imum of five seconds. Warning tone sounds. A lane boundary marking was crossed without using the turn signal. X Stay inside the lane boundary markings. X Use indicator before changing lanes. ¯ flashes for approximately ten sec- onds. Warning tone sounds. Colour display: ¯ Cruise control inop‐ erative appears. Cruise control is malfunctioning and deactivates automatically. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ¯ flashes for approximately ten sec- onds. C and other warning lamps are also lit. Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Elec‐ tronics malfunction Visit workshop appears. Central vehicle electronics system and cruise control are mal- functioning. After switching off the engine, it is no longer pos- sible to lock or unlock the doors using the remote control on the key or to start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. È lights up. Speed display flashes. Warning tone sounds. Vehicle is exceeding the set limit speed. X Brake the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic condi- tions. È flashes for approximately ten sec- onds. Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Lim‐ iter inoperative appears. Speed limiter is malfunctioning and deactivates automatically. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Ò warning lamp flashes for a minute or lights up continuously. Colour display: Black ice warning appears. The outside temperature has fallen to or below 3 °C. There is a risk of black ice. X Adapt your driving style and speed to suit the weather condi- tions. 202 Driver assistance systems

Practical advice.

Battery, lights, heating

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 212 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Rear window heating or seat heating switches off automati- cally or cannot be switched on. Battery is not sufficiently charged. X Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. Ý Yellow warning lamp lights up. Battery reserve level appears. The charge status of the high-voltage battery has dropped into the reserve range. X Charge the high-voltage battery. Monochrome display: Ý Yellow warning lamp flashes. Colour display: Ý Yellow warning lamp lights up. Battery reserve level appears. Charge status of the high-voltage battery is below 10 %. X Charge the high-voltage battery. õ Display flashes. The vehicle has switched itself off. Battery charge too low Charge HV bat‐ tery now appears. The vehicle has switched itself off because the charge status of the high-voltage battery is too low. After restarting the vehicle, depending on the charge status of the high-voltage battery, the vehicle can only drive on a maximum of 1 km. X Park the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic condi- tions. X Charge the high-voltage battery.

Red warning lamp

lights up when driving or when the vehicle is ready to start. Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Stop See Owner's Manual appears. 12 V battery is not being charged or the high-voltage battery is malfunctioning. X Do not drive on. The engine may switch itself off after a short while. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off the engine. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. It may not be possible to drive the vehicle further and it may not be possible to restart the engine. Colour display: # Warning lamp lights up. Malfunction Visit workshop appears. Battery monitoring is malfunctioning. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Monochrome display: b Warning lamp lights up. Dipped beam is on continuously. Main beam cannot be activated. X Switch off the engine. X Start the engine. Battery, lights, heating 203

Practical advice. Z

Problem

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 213 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Warning lamp remains lit. Brake lamps are inoperative. The bulb or LED is faulty. G WARNING Risk of accident due to faulty brake lamps. The brake lamps are faulty and no longer alert other road users when braking. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Warning lamp still remains lit. Rain/light sensor is malfunctioning. X Manually adjust exterior lighting. X Manually adjust windscreen wipers. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: b Warning lamp lights up. Malfunction See Own‐ er's Manual appears. Dipped beam is on continuously. Main beam cannot be activated. X Switch off the engine. X Restart the engine. Warning lamp remains lit. Rain/light sensor is malfunctioning. X Manually adjust exterior lighting. X Manually adjust windscreen wipers. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: b Warning lamp lights up. Brake lamps inoper‐ ative appears. Brake lamps are inoperative. The bulb or LED is faulty. G WARNING Risk of accident due to faulty brake lamps. The brake lamps are faulty and no longer alert other road users when braking. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: Switch off lights appears. Warning tone sounds. Lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. X Turn control knob for the lights to à or u. 204 Battery, lights, heating

Practical advice.

smart Audio-System and smart Media-System

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 214 · Applies to: 453

Bluetooth® connection Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Bluetooth® connection cannot be established between the smart Audio-System or smart Media-System and mobile phone. X Ascertain whether the mobile phone is compatible with the system. Information about compatible mobile phones: www.smart.com/connect X Check the security settings on your mobile phone. X Check that the Bluetooth® function is enabled on the smart Audio-System or smart Media-system and on your mobile phone. X Start the device search on the smart Audio-System or smart Media-System and on the mobile phone. Navigation system in the smart Media-System Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions No map is displayed in the navigation system. The SD card with the map data is missing or damaged. X Check to see that the SD card is inserted. Position of the vehicle in the navigation sys- tem does not match the vehicle's actual posi- tion. GPS symbol on the dis- play is grey or yellow. GPS reception is poor. X Drive the vehicle to another position where GPS reception is better. The road's course in the navigation system no longer coincides with the actual road. The map data is out of date. X Update the map data. Navigation system does not display any traffic information. Route guidance has not been started. X Select a destination and start navigation. HD Traffic is not available or the subscription for HD Traffic has expired. X Check whether HD Traffic is available for the country you are in or upgrade the subscription for HD Traffic. There are no naviga- tion messages during route guidance. The road's course is not detected. The map data may be out of date. X Check if route guidance has started. X If not, select a destination and start navigation. Navigation messages are switched off. X Switch on navigation messages. smart Audio-System and smart Media-System 205

Practical advice. Z

Voice control system in the smart Media-System

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 215 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The voice control sys- tem does not under- stand voice commands. The interval for entering voice commands has been exceeded. X Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Voice commands have not been given from the driver's seat. X Issue voice commands from the driver's seat. Noise from the blower or wind noise are interfering with voice commands. X Avoid interfering noises. Voice commands have not been given clearly. X Speak clearly when giving voice commands. A voice command is unknown. X Enter voice command "Help". A list of possible voice commands appears. 206 smart Audio-System and smart Media-System

Practical advice.

Obtaining technical data

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 216 · Applies to: 453

Information on technical data:

www.smart.de

The technical data was determined in

accordance with EC Directives. All data

applies to the vehicle's standard equipment.

Differences will be present in the case of

vehicles with optional equipment. Further

information is available from any smart

Centre.

Reading vehicle data

Useful information

Deviations from specified data:

RThe heights and lengths specified vary as

a result of:

- tyres

- load

- condition of the suspension

- optional equipment

RItems of optional equipment reduce the

maximum payload

RVehicle-specific weight information can

be found on the vehicle identification

plate

ROnly for certain countries: you can find

vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC

documents (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORM-

ITY). These documents are delivered with

your vehicle.

Vehicle identification plate

Vehicle identification plate position

Vehicle identification plate ; Vehicle manufacturer = EU type approval number ? Vehicle identification number (VIN) A Maximum permissible gross weight B Maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle combination C Maximum permissible front axle load D Maximum permissible rear axle load E Paint code i The data shown on the vehicle identifi- cation plate is example data. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. The data appli- cable to the vehicle is found on the vehi- cle's identification plate. Vehicle identification number (VIN) X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear- most position. X Fold floor covering : upwards. VIN ; is located there. The VIN can also be found on the vehicle identification plate. Reading vehicle data 207

Technical data.

Dimensions and weights

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 217 · Applies to: 453

Missing technical data was not available at the time of going to print. smart EQ forfour Dimensions and weights Opening height : 2012 mm Vehicle length 3495 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 1875 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1665 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors for vehicles equipped with wheel trims Vehicle height 1554 mm Wheelbase 2494 mm Maximum ground clear- ance 108 mm Permissible roof load 0 kg smart forfour crosstown edition Dimensions, weights and volumes Opening height : 2012 mm Vehicle length 3512 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 1875 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1665 mm smart forfour crosstown edition Dimensions, weights and volumes Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors for vehicles equipped with wheel trims Vehicle height 1554 mm Wheelbase 2494 mm Maximum ground clear- ance 108 mm Permissible roof load Charging time i The options listed for charging a high- voltage battery are not available in all countries. High-voltage battery Type Lithium-ion Vehicles with a 7 kW / 4.6 kW on-board charger Charging time (from 0% to 80%) at 32 A / 230 V Approx. 2 h 30 min Charging time (from 0% to 80%) at 20 A / 230 V Approx. 3 h 30 min Charging time (from 0% to 80%) at 10 A / 230 V Approx. 7 h 30 min Charging time (from 0% to 80%) at 8 A / 230 V Approx. 9 h 30 min Vehicles with a 22 kW on- board charger Charging time (from 0% to 80%) at 3x32 A / 230 V Approx. 45 min 208 Reading vehicle data

Technical data.

Charging cable

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 218 · Applies to: 453

Charging the battery at a charging station or wall box Nominal voltage max. 400 V AC, max. 3-phase Nominal frequency 50 Hz / 60 Hz Nominal current max. 32 A Charge output from 4.6 kW to 22 kW System of protection IP44 (inserted), IP24 (not inser- ted) Outside temperature Observe the notes on maintaining the high- voltage bat- tery(Y page 79) -40 † to +50 † Standards IEC 61851-1, IEC 62196-1, IEC 62186-2 Interface Type 2 to Type 2 Also observe the identification plate on the charging cable connector. Service products Please note Also observe the information in the section "Checking and refilling service products" (Y page 156). Vehicle components and their respective service products must match. Therefore, only use products tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Information on service products The following table lists all technical data for the service products of the vehicle. Fur- ther information on service products: http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com and in any smart centre. Service prod- ucts Specifications Corrosion inhibitor/ antifreeze (Y page 156) Recommended: G40 Windscreen washer fluid (Y page 157) Temperatures above freezing point: mixing ratio of 1:100 MB SummerFit to water. Temperatures below freezing point: for the cor- rect mixing ratio of MB WinterFit and water, please observe the infor- mation on the antifreeze container. Bulb types The following table lists the correct bulb types of the vehicle: Bulb Type Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps H4 60/55 W Front foglamps H 16 Turn signals PY 21 W Side turn signal lamps WY 5 W Licence plate lighting W 5 W Interior lighting W 5 W Tail lamps Bulb Type Tail lamp and brake lamp P21 5 W Rear foglamp P21 W Reversing lamp W 16 W Turn signals PY 21 W Bulb types 209

Technical data.

Fuse allocation

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 219 · Applies to: 453

No. Consumer Current Colour cod- ing 1 Starter motor 5 A Brown 2 Power steering control unit 5 A Brown 3 Multifunction lever 5 A Brown 4 Airbag 5 A Brown 5 ‑ ‑ ‑ 6 Instrument cluster 10 A Red 7 Horn, alarm system 15 A Blue 8 Power supply control unit 10 A Red 9 Power supply control unit 10 A Red 10 Central control unit 20 A Yellow 11 Central control unit 15 A Blue 12 Central control unit 10 A Red 13 Central control unit 15 A Blue 14 Power window switch (without reversing func- tion) 30 A Green 15 ESP®, transmission control unit 5 A Brown 16 Interior lighting 10 A Red 17 Immobiliser 3 A Violet 18 Electrical exterior mirror 5 A Brown 210 Fuse allocation

Technical data.

Consumer

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 220 · Applies to: 453

No. Consumer Current Colour cod- ing 19 Brake lamps 10 A Red 20 Cruise control, radio, belt warning 15 A Blue 21 Not for smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart EQ forfour: central control unit, fuel pump, ignition system 15 A Blue 22 Rear window wiper 15 A Blue 23 Starter motor smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart EQ forfour only: power supply control unit 40 A Orange 24 ‑ ‑ ‑ 25 Power supply control unit 30 A Green 26 Radio 20 A Yellow 27 Daytime driving lamps 5 A Brown 28 12 V socket, cigarette lighter 15 A Blue 29 Power supply control unit 5 A Brown 30 Forward collision warning 15 A Blue 31 ‑ ‑ ‑ 32 Radio, central control unit 15 A Blue 33 Tail lamps, front foglamps, hazard warning lamp button, locking button, headlamp range control, power windows, licence plate lighting, radio, control unit for heating or climate control system, cruise control, limiter, parking aid button, pro- gram selector button, tailgate release, Lane Keep- ing Assist camera, automatic start/stop system button 25 A Cyan 34 Power supply control unit 25 A Cyan 35 Headlamps, daytime driving lamps 25 A Cyan 36 - 40 ‑ ‑ ‑ 41 smart EQ forfour only: seat heating in the rear 15 A Blue 42 smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart EQ forfour only: seat heating in the front 25 A Cyan 43 Mirror heating 5 A Brown 44 Power windows (automatic reversing feature) 25 A Cyan Fuse allocation 211

Technical data.

Consumer

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 221 · Applies to: 453

No. Consumer Current Colour cod- ing 45 Transmission control unit smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart EQ forfour only: EQ control unit 5 A Brown 46 Radio amplifier 20 A Yellow 47 ‑ ‑ ‑ 48 smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart EQ forfour only: vacuum pump 10 A Red 49 smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart EQ forfour only: heating control unit, air-condition- ing 10 A Red Radio type approvals for the tyre pres- sure monitors Country Radio type approval number Argen- tina MW2433A H-12337 GG4 H-12338 Brazil 2770-12-8001 Model: MW2433A 0381-13-8001 Model: GG4 Abu Dhabi Dubai TRA, Registered-NO ER0092100/12 TRA, Registered-NO ER0099792/12 TRA, Registered-NO ER0076990/11 Dealer-NO: DA0047074/10 Country Radio type approval number Jordan Model: Gen Alpha Wal 2 TPMS transmitter Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2012/114 Model: Gen Gamma Gen 4 433.92 MHz. Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2012/190 Model: Corax 3 MRXMC34MA4 Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2011/158 Type Number: LPD Morocco MR7319 ANRT 2012/ 11/07/2012 MR7672 ANRT 2012/ 23/11/2012 MR6706 ANRT 2011 Moldova 1024 Philip- pines No: ESD-1206394C No: ESD-1306871C Serbia И 011 12 Singa- pore Compliance with IDA Standard DA- 103365 South Africa TA-2012/719 TA-2012/1540 TA-2011/1370 212 Radio type approvals for the tyre pressure monitors

Technical data.

Installing two-way radios and mobile

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 222 · Applies to: 453

phones

G WARNING

The electromagnetic radiation from two-

way radios can interfere with the vehicle

electronics if they are manipulated or ret-

rofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardise

the operating safety of the vehicle. There is

a risk of an accident.

You should have all work on electrical and

electronic components carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING

If you operate two-way radios incorrectly

in the vehicle, their electromagnetic radi-

ation can interfere with the vehicle elec-

tronics, for example if:

Rthe two-way radio is not connected to an

exterior aerial

Rthe exterior aerial is not correctly moun-

ted or is not low-reflection

This could jeopardise the operating safety

of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fit-

ted at a qualified specialist workshop.

When operating two-way radios in the

vehicle, always connect them to the low-

reflection exterior aerial.

! Have the engine electronics and parts

belonging to it such as control units, sen-

sors, actuating components or electric

cables maintained only at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop. Otherwise, vehicle com-

ponents may wear more quickly and the

vehicle's operating permit may be invali-

dated.

! The operating permit may be invalidated

if the instructions for installation and use

of two-way radios are not observed.

In particular, the following conditions

must be complied with:

Ronly approved wavebands may be used

Robserve the maximum permissible out-

put in these wavebands

Ronly approved aerial positions may be

used

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radia-

tion can cause damage to health. The use of

an exterior aerial takes into consideration

the scientific discussion surrounding the

possible health risk posed by electromag-

netic fields.

The following aerial positions may be used

for the correct installation of two-way

radios:

Front roof area ; Rear roof area i On vehicles with a folding top, fitting an aerial to the front roof area is not permit- ted. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for instal- lation of aftermarket radio frequency trans- mitting equipment") when retrofitting two- way radios. Comply with the legal require- ments for add-on parts. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and aerial connections intended for use in the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions during installation. Deviations with respect to wavebands, max- imum transmission outputs or aerial posi- tions must be approved by smart. Installing two-way radios and mobile phones 213

Technical data. Z

The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 223 · Applies to: 453

the base of the aerial must not exceed the following values: Waveband Maximum transmission output Tetra 380 - 410 MHz 20 W Mobile communications generation 2G/3G/4G 6 W The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: Rtwo-way radios with a maximum trans- mission output of up to 100 mW Rmobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: Rtetra Rmobile communications (2G/3G/4G) 214 Installing two-way radios and mobile phones

Technical data.

Publication details

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 226 · Applies to: 453

Internet Further information about smart vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.smart.com http://www.daimler.com Editorial office You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding this Owner's Manual to the technical documen- tation team at the following address: Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG. Vehicle manufacturer Daimler AG Mercedesstraße 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany As at 04.09.2017

É4535846814*ËÍ

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 227 · Applies to: 453

4535846814 Order no. 6522 0286 02 Part no. 453 584 68 14 Edition ÄJ2017-1c www.smart.com smart - A Daimler brand É999109020R*ËÍ 9 9 9 1 0 9 0 2 0 R VC

Other ManualsLib Projects

EQ_Forfour_Owners_Manual_220p.pdf · p. 228 · Applies to: 453

www.manualslib.com www.manualslib.de www.manualslib.es www.manualslib.fr www.manualslib.nl www.manualslib.mx www.manualslib.tech 30+ Languages